Category: Suzuki

Introduction

Suzuki Motor Corporation is a Japanese multinational automotive manufacturing company headquartered in Hamamatsu, Japan. The company specializes in the production of automobiles, motorcycles, ATVs, and marine engines. Here are some key milestones in the company’s history:

1909: Michio Suzuki founds the Suzuki Loom Works to produce weaving looms for Japan’s silk industry.
1937: The company diversifies into manufacturing small cars, starting with the Suzuki Fronte.
1955: Suzuki introduces its first motorcycle, the Colleda.
1963: The company launches the Suzulight, Japan’s first lightweight car with front-wheel drive.
1965: Suzuki enters the U.S. market with the introduction of the Suzuki T20 motorcycle.
1970: The Suzuki Jimny, a compact off-road vehicle, is introduced.
1977: The company begins production of the Suzuki Alto, a popular small car that is still in production today.
1981: Suzuki forms a partnership with General Motors to produce small cars for the U.S. market.
1985: The Suzuki Samurai, a compact SUV, is introduced in the U.S.
2002: Suzuki forms a strategic alliance with General Motors, with GM taking a 20% stake in the company.
2006: The Suzuki SX4 compact car is introduced.
2010: Suzuki introduces the Kizashi, its first mid-size sedan.
2012: Suzuki announces that it will end its partnership with General Motors.
2015: The company unveils the Suzuki Baleno, a new compact car model.
2020: Suzuki announces that it will exit the U.S. market due to poor sales.

Today, Suzuki is one of the largest automotive manufacturers in Japan and has a significant presence in other countries around the world. The company is known for its innovative and reliable products, and has won numerous awards for its cars and motorcycles.

In addition to its domestic market in Japan, Suzuki has a significant presence in other countries, including India, where it is the largest car manufacturer. The company has formed partnerships with other automotive manufacturers, such as General Motors and Volkswagen, and has collaborated on various projects and joint ventures.

Suzuki has a reputation for being a leader in small car production and has focused on producing fuel-efficient vehicles. The company has also made significant investments in electric and hybrid vehicles, with the goal of reducing emissions and improving sustainability.

Overall, Suzuki is a respected and established name in the automotive industry, known for its high-quality products and commitment to innovation and sustainability.

What we are doing?

We are publishing the Suzuki user guides, User Manuals, and Owner Instructions. Everything you need to know about your Suzuki vehicles to get any fixes. Get the Owner’s Manual for your specific Suzuki online.

Readable and Downloadable

Find information on how to operate your v Vehicles manuals. Read the complete and specific sections and Download your manual if you have to.
Suzuki User Guides – Autouserguide.com

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 Controls and Equipment User Manual

Controls and Equipment

Heating and Air Conditioning System

There are three types of heating and air conditioning systems as follows:

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
Digital air conditioning system
Automatic heating and air conditioning system (climate control)

Air Outlet

Windshield defroster outlet
Side defroster outlet
Side outlet
Center outlet
Floor outlet
Cup holder outlet (if equipped)

Center outlet

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of air flow as desired.

Side outlet

When open, air comes out regardless of the air flow selector position.
Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally, to adjust the direction of air flow as desired.
The side outlet opens when you turn the dial (2) upward and closes when you turn it downward.

CAUTION
Prolonged exposure to hot air from the heater or air conditioner could result in low temperature burns. All vehicle occupants, particularly children, the elderly, those with special needs, individuals with delicate skin, and sleeping individuals, should maintain sufficient distance from the air outlets to prevent prolonged exposure to hot airflow.

Overhead Rear Air Conditioning System (if equipped)

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System

To turn on the overhead rear air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector of the manual heating and air conditioning system to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. Refer to “Air conditioning switch” in this section. And set the rear blower speed selector (2) to a position other than off.

(Digital Air Conditioning System)

To turn on the overhead rear air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector of the digital air conditioning system to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. Refer to “Air conditioning switch” in this section. And set the rear blower speed selector (2) to a position other than off.

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System

To turn on the overhead rear air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector of the automatic heating and air conditioning system to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. Refer to “Air conditioning switch” in this section. And set the rear blower speed selector (2) to a position other than off.
Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of air flow as desired.
During operation of the air conditioner, you may notice slight changes in engine speed. These changes are normal, the system is designed so that the compressor turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature. Less operation of the compressor results in better fuel economy.

Description of Controls

Temperature selector
Blower speed selector
Air intake selector
Air flow selector
Air conditioning switch

Temperature selector (1)
This is used to adjust the temperature.

Blower speed selector (2)
This is used to turn on the blower and to select blower speed.

Air intake selector (3) (Left hand drive vehicle)

This selector is used to select the following modes.

FRESH AIR (a)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to left, outside air comes in.

RECIRCULATED AIR (b)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to right, outside air is shut out and inside air is recirculated. This mode is suit-able when driving through dusty or polluted air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting to quickly cool down or warm up the interior.
Air intake selector (3) (Right hand drive vehicle)

This selector is used to select the following modes.
RECIRCULATED AIR (a)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to left, outside air is shut out and inside air is recirculated. This mode is suit-able when driving through dusty or polluted air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting to quickly cool down or warm up the interior.
FRESH AIR (b)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to right, outside air comes in.

NOTE:
If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated and the windows tend to get misted. Therefore, you should select FRESH AIR whenever possible.

NOTE:
The mark of “USE WITH” (6)
To clear fog on the windshield and/or the side windows quickly, set the air flow selector (4) to “HEAT & DEFROST” or “DEFROST” and air intake selector (3) to “FRESH AIR”. These positioning will clear the fogged windshield and/or the side windows faster than the “RECIRCULATED AIR”.

Air flow selector (4)

This is used to select one of the following functions.

VENTILATION (c)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the center, side and cup holder outlets (if equipped).

BI-LEVEL (d)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and cooler air comes out of the center, side and cup holder outlets (if equipped). When the temperature selector (1) is in the fully cold position or fully hot position, however, the air from the floor outlets and the air from the center, side and cup holder outlets (if equipped) will be the same temperature.

HEAT (e)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and the side outlets, also comes out of the windshield defroster out-lets and also comes slightly out of the side defroster outlets.

HEAT & DEFROST (f)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

DEFROST (g)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

Air conditioning switch (5)
To turn on the air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. With this “A/C” switch operation, a indicator light will come on when the air conditioning system is working. To turn off the air conditioning system, push “A/C” switch again.
During operation of the air conditioner, you may notice slight changes in engine speed. These changes are normal, the system is designed so that the compressor turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature.
Less operation of the compressor results in better fuel economy.

System Operating Instructions

Natural ventilation
Select VENTILATION and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed selector to off. Fresh air will flow through the vehicle during driving.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heating Select BI-LEVEL and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Unless the temperature selector is in the fully cold position or fully hot position, the air that comes out of the center and side outlets will be cooler than the air that comes out of the floor outlets.

Normal cooling
Set the air flow selector to VENTILATION, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position, and turn on “A/C” switch. Setting the blower speed selector to a higher blower speed position increases cooling efficiency.
You can switch the air intake selector to either FRESH AIR or RECIRCULATED AIR as you desire. Choosing RECIRCU-LATED AIR increases cooling efficiency.
Quick cooling (using recirculated air) The base settings are the same as for nor-mal cooling except you select RECIRCU-LATED AIR and the highest blower speed.

NOTE:

If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated and the windows tend to get misted. There-fore, you should select FRESH AIR whenever possible.
If your vehicle has been left in the sun with the windows closed, it will cool faster if you open the windows briefly while you operate the air conditioner with the air intake selector at FRESH AIR and the blower at high speed.

Dehumidifying
Set the air flow selector to a desired air flow selector position, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Also select FRESH AIR and turn on “A/C” switch.

NOTE:
Because the air conditioner dehumidifies the air, turning it on will help keep the windows clear, even when blowing heated air using DEFROST or HEAT & DEFROST functions.

NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting:

Select DEFROST and FRESH AIR,
Set the blower speed selector to high,
Adjust the temperature selector to the hot end,
Turn on “A/C” switch, and
Adjust the side outlets so the air blows on the side windows.

Maintenance
If you do not use the air conditioner for a long period, such as during winter, it may not give the best performance when you start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air conditioner, it needs to be run periodically. Operate the air conditioner at least once a month for one minute with the engine idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil and helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equipped with air filters, clean or replace them as specified in “Maintenance schedule” in “INSPEC-TION AND MAINTENANCE” section. Have this job done by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as the lower glove box must be lowered for this job.

NOTE:
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called “R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around 1993 for automotive applications. Other refrigerants are available, including recycled R-12, but only R-134a should be used in your vehicle.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.

Digital Air Conditioning System

Description of Controls

Temperature selector
Blower speed selector
Air intake selector
Air flow selector
Defrost switch
Air conditioning switch
“OFF” switch
Maximum cooling switch
Display

Temperature selector (1)

Turn the temperature selector (1) to adjust the temperature.

NOTE:

The temperature setting can be adjusted to 8 levels. The current setting value (1 to 8) is displayed in the display.
If you turn the temperature selector (1) clockwise until the setting value is changed to “8” and “MAX” appears on the display, the air conditioning system will operate at maximum cooling.
If you turn the temperature selector (1) counterclockwise until the setting value is changed to “1” and “MIN” appears on the display, the air conditioning system will operate at minimum cooling.

Blower speed selector (2)

The blower speed selector (2) is used to turn on the blower and to select blower speed.

Air intake selector (3)

Push the air intake selector (3) to change between the recirculated air and fresh air modes.

RECIRCULATED AIR (a)
When this mode is selected, outside air is shut off and inside air is recirculated. This mode is suitable when driving through dusty or polluted air such as a tunnel, or when attempting to quickly cool down the interior.

FRESH AIR (b)
When this mode is selected, outside air is introduced.
FRESH AIR and RECIRCULATED AIR are selected alternately each time the air intake selector is pushed.

Air flow selector (4)

Push the air flow selector (4) to change among the following functions. The indication of the selected mode appears in the display.

VENTILATION (c)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the center and side outlets.

BI-LEVEL (d)

FOOT & DEFROST (f)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

Defrost switch (5)

Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the defroster.

DEFROST

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

NOTE:
When the defrost switch (5) is pushed to turn on the defroster, the air conditioning system will operate and FRESH AIR mode will be selected automatically. In very cold weather, however, the air conditioning system will not operate.

Air conditioning switch (6)

The air conditioning switch (6) is used to turn on and off the air conditioning system only when the blower is on. To turn on the air conditioning system, push in the switch and “A/C” will appear in the display. To turn off the air conditioning system, push in the switch again and “A/C” will go off.

Maximum cooling switch (8)

Push the maximum cooling switch (8) to cool down the interior at peak efficiency.

NOTE:

When the maximum cooling switch is pushed, “MAX A/C” will appear in the display and the air conditioning system will operate in the following settings automatically.
- The air conditioner: On
- The blower speed: Full speed
- The temperature setting level: Level 8 (MAX)
- The air flow mode: VENTILATION (c)
- The air intake mode: RECIRCULATED AIR (a)
To return to the current setting, push the maximum cooling switch again.

System Operating Instructions

To set the air conditioning system, follow the procedure below.

Start the engine.
Set the desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selector (2).
Set the desired temperature by turning the temperature selector (1).

You can use the air conditioning switch (6) to manually turn the air conditioner on or off according to your preference. When you turn the air conditioning switch off, the air conditioning system cannot lower the inside temperature below the outside temperature.
To turn the air conditioning system off, push the “OFF” switch (7).

Normal cooling
Set the air flow selector (4) to VENTILA-TION (c), the temperature selector (1) to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector (2) to the desired blower speed position. Setting the blower speed selector (2) to a higher blower speed position increases cooling efficiency.
You can switch the air intake selector (3) to either FRESH AIR (b) or RECIRCULATED AIR (a) as you desire. Choosing RECIR-CULATED AIR (a) increases cooling efficiency.

NOTE:
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called R-134a. R-134a replaced R-12 around 1993 for automotive applications. Other refrigerants are available, including recycled R-12, but only R-134a should be used in your vehicle.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control)

Description of Controls

Temperature selector
Blower speed selector
Air intake selector
Air flow selector
Defrost switch
Air conditioning switch
“OFF” switch
“AUTO” switch
Display

Temperature selector (1)

Turn the temperature selector (1) to adjust the temperature.

NOTE:
If you turn the temperature selector (1) until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display, the climate control system will operate at maximum heating or cooling. The temperature of the air from the outlets may change suddenly while “LO” or “HI” is displayed, but this is normal.

NOTE:
When you change the unit of temperature in the information display, the unit of temperature in the air conditioning system will be changed. Refer to “Information display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details.

Blower speed selector (2)

The blower speed selector (2) is used to turn on the blower and to select blower speed.
If “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the blower speed will vary automatically as the climate control system maintains the selected temperature.

Air intake selector (3)

Push the air intake selector (3) to change between the recirculated air and fresh air modes.
If “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the air intake will vary automatically as the climate control system maintains the selected temperature.

NOTE:
When the recirculated air mode is selected, the automatic operation system is deactivated even if you push “AUTO” switch (8).

FRESH AIR (b)
When this mode is selected, outside air is introduced.
FRESH AIR and RECIRCULATED AIR are selected alternately each time the air intake selector is pushed.

Air flow selector (4)

Push the air flow selector (4) to change among the following functions. The indication of the selected mode appears in the display.
If “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the air flow will vary automatically as the climate control system maintains the selected temperature.

VENTILATION (c)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the center, side and cup holder outlets.

BI-LEVEL (d)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and cooler air comes out of the center, side and cup holder outlets. When the temperature selector (1) is in the fully cold position or fully hot position, how-ever, the air from the floor outlets and the air from the center, side and cup holder outlets will be the same temperature.

HEAT (e)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and the side outlets, a small amount of air comes out of the wind-shield defroster outlets and also comes slightly out of the side defroster outlets.

HEAT & DEFROST (f)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

Defrost switch (5)

Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the defroster.

DEFROST

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

Air conditioning switch (6)

System Operating Instructions

Automatic operation

You can let the climate control system work automatically. To set the system for fully-automatic operation, follow the procedure below.

Start the engine.
Push “AUTO” switch (8).
Set the desired temperature by turning the temperature selector (1).

The blower speed, air intake and air flow are controlled automatically to maintain the set temperature. However, the air flow is not changed to DEFROST position automatically..

NOTE:
When the recirculated air mode is selected, the automatic operation system is deactivated even if you push “AUTO” switch (8).
You can use the air conditioning switch (6) to manually turn the air conditioner on or off according to your preference. When you turn the air conditioning switch off, the climate control system cannot lower the inside temperature below outside temperature.
To turn the climate control system off, push the “OFF” switch (7).

NOTE:
If “AUTO” in the display blinks, there is a problem in the heating system and/or air conditioning system. You should have the system inspected by a Suzuki dealer or a qualified workshop.

NOTE:

To find the temperature at which you are most comfortable, start with the 22°C (72°F) or 25°C (75°F) setting. (the temperature vary depending on vehicle specifications.).
If you turn the temperature selector (1) until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display, the climate control system will operate at maximum heating or cooling and the blower will run at full speed.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather or hot air in hot weather, the system will delay turning on the blower until warmed or cooled air is available.
If your vehicle has been left in the sun with the windows closed, it will cool faster if you open the windows briefly.
Even under the automatic operation, you can set individual selectors to the manual mode. The manually selected functions are maintained, and the other functions remain under automatic operation.
If the windshield and/or the front door windows are fogged, push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the defroster, or push the air flow selector (4) to change the air flow to HEAT & DEFROST position to defog the windows.
To return the blower speed selector (2), air intake selector (3), and air flow selector (4) to automatic operation, push “AUTO” switch (8).

Be careful not to cover the interior temperature sensor (10) located between the steering wheel and the climate control panel, or the solar sensor (11) located at the top of the driver’s side dashboard. These sensors are used by the automatic system to regulate temperature.

Manual operation
You can manually control the climate control system. Set the selectors to the desired positions.

NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting:

Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the defroster (the air conditioning system will operate and FRESH AIR mode will be selected automatically),
Set the blower speed selector to high,
Adjust the temperature selector to “HI” indication on the display, and
Adjust the side outlets so the air blows on the side windows.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.

Radio Antenna

The radio antenna on the roof is removable. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn it clockwise firmly by hand.

NOTE:
Adjust the antenna angle to maximum for optimum radio reception.

NOTICE
To avoid damage to the radio antenna:

Remove the antenna when using an automatic car wash.
Remove the antenna when the antenna hits anything such as a low ceiling in a parking garage or putting a car cover over your vehicle.

Audio System (if equipped)

Safety Information
If you pay too much attention to operating the audio system or watching the audio system display while driving, an accident can occur. If you set the sound volume too loud, it could prevent you from being aware of road and traffic conditions.

Keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive. Avoid paying too much attention to operating the audio system or watching the audio system display.
Familiarize yourself with the audio system controls and operation of the audio system before driving.
Preset your favorite radio stations before driving so that you can quickly tune to them using the presets.
Set the sound volume to a level that will allow you to continue to be aware of surrounding road and traffic conditions while driving.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks and are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Ink.
Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth® ready device whenever requested. This unit shares the communication frequency with other private or public wireless communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless communication radios.
You should stop using this unit immediately whenever you are notified that your unit disturbs other wireless communication.

Basic Operations

POWER button
“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“ENTER” button
BACK button
SETUP button
“VOLUME” button

Turning power on/off
Touch the POWER button (1).
The audio system starts in the function mode it was in when the power was turned off last.

Touching the POWER button (1) for 1 second or longer can turn off the audio system.

Slide touch operation
Operate several functions with the slide touch operation. Touch the panel and slide up or down with your finger for increase/decrease or up/down operation.

NOTE:
Pay caution to the following content regarding slide touch operation:

The touch button may not operate properly when the touch panel or your fingers are wet. Remove any liquid before operating.
Depending on the operation method it may react without touching.
It may not react properly when operated with gloves on.
When metal objects are placed near the touch panel it may cause a malfunction.
Do not attach protective film. Otherwise, the touch panel may not operate properly.

Functions available with the slide touch operation

Mode	Function
Common	Volume up/down	O	–
Common	Item selection	–	O
Radio	TUNE up/down	–	O
USB	File up/down	–	O
USB	Folder up/down (folder operation mode)	–	O
iPod	TRACK up/down	–	O
iPod	Category selection (iPod menu)	–	O
Bluetooth® audio	TRACK up/down	–	O
Bluetooth® audio	Group up/down (Group operation mode)	–	O
Hands-free	Reception/ringtone/incoming call volume up/down	O	–
Hands-free	Switching pages of the speed dial selection screen	–	O

Adjusting the volume
Touch or slide the “VOLUME” button (6).

To increase the volume, touch or slide upwards.
To decrease the volume, touch or slide downwards.

NOTE:
While driving, adjust the volume to an extent that sound and/or noise coming from outside can be heard.

Sound settings

Touch the SETUP button (5).
- Touch for 1 second or longer when using radio mode.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select “Sound”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The sound setting screen will be displayed.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (2), select the desired item, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The sound settings will change as follows:
  EQ ↔ Bass ↔ Treble ↔ Balance ↔ Fader ↔ AVC

Preset EQ
The preset EQ can set various types of sounds depending on the type of music.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “EQ”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select the desired item, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The preset EQ settings will change as follows:
  Off (Flat) ↔ Jazz ↔ Rock ↔ Pop ↔ Classic ↔ Hip-hop

Adjusting bass/treble/balance /fader The preset EQ can set various types of sounds depending on the type of music.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance”, or “Fader” and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), adjust to the desired settings and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- “Bass”/“Treble”:
- Can be adjusted in stages from -6 to 0 to +6.
- Touch to emphasize the low or high sounds, and touch to quiet.
- Balance”:
- Can be adjusted in 9 stages left to right.
  Touch to emphasize the right speaker, and touch to emphasize the left speaker.
- “Fader”:
- Can be adjusted in 9 stages back to front.
  Touch to emphasize the front speaker, and touch to emphasize the rear speaker.

Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume control)
The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function automatically adjusts (increases/decreases) the sound volume in accordance with vehicle speed. The AVC control is provided with three selectable levels (LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume adjustment increases together with the LEVEL number.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “AVC”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “AVC”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select the desired level, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The AVC will change as follows:
  Off ↔ Level 1 ↔ Level 2 ↔ Level 3

System Settings
Change the “Beep”, “Slide”, and “SW Sensitivity” settings.

Touch the SETUP button (5).
Touch for 1 second or longer when using radio mode.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select “System”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The system setting screen will be dis-played.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (2), select the desired item, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

The system settings will change as follows:
Beep ↔ Slide ↔ SW Sensitivity

BEEP on/off

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “System” screen, select “Beep”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select on or off, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

Slide touch operation settings
Turn the slide operation on/off.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “System” screen, select “Slide”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select on or off, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

Touch panel sensitivity settings
Change the touch panel sensitivity.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “System” screen, select “SW Sensitivity”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select Low or High, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

NOTE:
If the touch button sensitivity is too high, set to “Low”.

Radio

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
Preset button
“RADIO” button*1
“CH” (channel) button
“AS” (auto store) button

Use this button to switch between manual preset and auto preset.

Display
Manual preset

Auto preset

Frequency
Band
Auto Store mode display
NOTE:
Radio Reception
Radio reception can be affected by environment, atmospheric conditions, or radio signal’s power and distance from the station. Nearby mountains and buildings may interfere or deflect radio reception, causing poor reception. Poor reception or radio static can also be caused by electric cur-rent from overhead wires or high voltage power lines.

Selecting the band

Touch the “RADIO” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
- AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM(AS) → FM(AS).

Seek tuning

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) for 1 second or longer.
The audio system stops searching for a station at a frequency where a broadcast station is available.

Manual tuning

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) to select the desired station.

Storing the station Manual store

Select the station and frequency.
Touch and hold the “CH” button (4) for at least 1 second.
Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6]) of the Preset buttons (2) to which you want to store the station for 2 seconds or longer.

NOTE:
6 stations can be stored for AM, and 6 stations for each of FM1 and FM2, thus 18 stations can be stored in total.

Auto store

Touch the “AS” button (5) for 1 second or longer.

Start searching from a station whose frequency is the lowest. When a broadcast station that can be received with a sufficient strength is discovered, it will be assigned to the AM (AS)/FM (AS) band’s preset button (2). Once this process is completed the tuner will return to the first stored broadcast station.

NOTE:

Auto store can be released by touching the “AS” button (5) while auto store is under way.
When the auto store is performed, the station previously stored in the memory at the position is overwritten.
6 stations can be preset for FM, and 6 stations for AM in auto store mode.

Select from the preset channels Manual preset channel

Select the radio station and frequency.
Touch the “CH” button (4) for 1 second or longer.
Touch a desired button ([1] to [6]) of the
Preset buttons (2).
NOTE:
Touch and hold the “CH” button (4) for at least one second to select from the preset channel list.

Auto preset channel

Touch the “RADIO” button (3) for 1 second mor longer　and select AM (AS) or FM (AS).
Touch the “CH” button (4) for 1 second or longer.
- The preset channel list is displayed.
Touch a desired button ([1] to [6]) of the Preset buttons (2).

USB

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“DISP/ENTER” button
BACK button
“FLD” (folder operation) button
SETUP (random/repeat) button
“MEDIA” button

Display

Play time
Text information display

WARNING
Do not connect any USB device other than a USB memory or a USB audio player. Do not connect multiple USB devices to the USB connector using a USB hub, etc. Supplying power to multiple USB devices from the connector could cause overheating and smoking.

Selecting a USB device mode

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6).

Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped).

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

Hold down the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1).

Hold down the Up button for 1 second or longer to fast forward the track.
Hold down the Down button for 1 second or longer to fast rewind the track.
Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding.

Selecting a track

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).

Touch the Up button to listen to the next track.
When the Down button is touched once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Touch the Down button twice to listen to the previous track.

Selecting a folder

Touch the “FLD” (folder operation) but-ton (4).
Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).
- Touch the Up button to move to the next folder.
- Touch the Down button to move to the previous folder.

Repeat playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) but-ton (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Repeat”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
- Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, the mode will change as follows:
  Off → Folder random → All random .

Random playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) but-ton (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Random”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2). Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, the mode will change as fol-lows:
Off → Folder random → All random .

Display change

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
MP3/AAC:
Artist name/Track title → Album name/Track title → Folder name/File name… WMA:
Artist name/Track title → Folder name/File name.

NOTE:

“NO TITLE” will be displayed when there is no text information in the USB device currently being played.
“…” is displayed if all text data cannot be displayed. Touch and hold the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) for at least 1 second to automatically display the rest of the text data.

Notes on USB device Compatible USB devices

USB Mass Storage Class
For details as to whether your USB memory/USB Audio is compatible with USB Mass Storage Class, please con-tact the USB memory/USB Audio manufacturer.
Audio file
MP3 (.mp3)/WMA (.wma)/AAC (.m4a)/AAC (.aac)
File System
FAT 12/16/32,VFAT (supporting long file name)
USB Standard Compatibility
1.1/2.0 Full Speed
If a USB hub or extension cable is connected to the audio system, it may not be recognized. In this case, directly con-nect the USB device to the audio system.
Devices such as MP3 players/mobile phones/digital cameras may not be recognized as audio systems for playing music.

USB device connection

When connecting a USB device, make sure that the connector is pushed all the way into the port.
Depending on the USB flash drive that you are using, (non-brand product, USB flash drive that has been externally dam-aged) it may disable connection or cause unstable operation.
Do not leave the USB device for long periods of time in places inside the vehicle where the temperature can rise too high.
Back up any important data beforehand. We cannot accept responsibility for any lost data.
It is recommended not to connect a USB device that contains data files other than MP3/WMA format.

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a USB device

Playback or display may not be possible depending on the type of USB device in use or the condition of the recording.
Depending on the connected USB memory, the files may be played in different order from the order that the files were stored.
The DRM (Digital Rights Management) file cannot be played.

Compression formats MP3

Bit rate
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 up to 320 kbps MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 up to 160 kbps MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 up to 160 kbps
VBR: up to 384 kbps (MAX.)
Sampling frequency
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32/44.1/48 kHz MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16/22.05/24 kHz MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8/11.025/12 kHz
Channel
Stereo/Joint stereo/Dual channel/Mon-aural
ID3 tag
ID3v1.x/ID3v2.x

WMA

Windows Media Audio Ver.7/Ver.8/Ver.9 Standard compliant
Bit rate: 32 up to 320 kbps
VBR: up to 384 kbps (MAX.)
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
WMA tag: Ver.8.0
Channel: 2 Channels

AAC

Bit rate: 16 up to 320 kbps
VBR: up to 320 kbps (MAX.)
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
AAC tag: iTunes m4a metadata

Maximum number of files/folders

Maximum number of files: 2500
Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
Maximum number of folders: 255
- Root folder and empty folder are included.
Maximum depth of tree structure: 8

NOTICE
Never use “.mp3”, “.wma” or “.m4a” as a file name extension if it is not in the MP3/WMA/AAC format file. Fail-ure to observe this may result in damage to the speaker due to noise production.

iPod

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“DISP/ENTER” button
BACK button
“FLD” (iPod menu) button
SETUP (shuffle/repeat) button
“MEDIA” button

Display

Play time
Text information display

Selecting an iPod mode

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6).`

Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

Hold down the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).

Hold down the Up button for 1 second or longer to fast forward the track. : Hold down the Down button for 1 second or longer to fast rewind the track.
Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding.

Selecting a track

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).

Touch the Up button to listen to the next track.
When the Down button is touched once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Touch the Down button twice to listen to the previous track.

Select a category

Touch the “FLD” (iPod menu) button 4
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select the desired category, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

The Song selection mode for each cate-gory will be displayed as follows.
Playlists: Playlists → Songs
Artists: Artists → Albums → Songs
Songs: Songs
Genres: Genres → Artists → Albums
Songs
Radio: Station
Audiobooks: Audiobooks
Podcasts: Podcasts → Episodes
i Tunes U: i Tunes U → Episodes

NOTE:
Categories is not displayed if the no files in the category.

Repeat playback

Touch the SETUP (shuffle/repeat) but-ton (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Repeat”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2). Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
The repeat mode will vary depending on your device.
Off → 1 song repeat → All repeat .

Random playback

Touch the SETUP (shuffle/repeat) button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/
Down button (1), select “Shuffle”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
Off → Shuffle → Album shuffle …

Display change

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
Artist name/Track title → Album name/
Track title → Playlist name/Track title…

NOTE:

“NO TITLE” is displayed if the file currently being played has no text data.
“…” is displayed if all text data cannot be displayed. Touch and hold the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) for at least one sec-ond to automatically display the rest of the text data.
“Playlist name/song name” is only dis-played by the “FLD” (Menu) button (4) when music is selected from Playlists.

Notes on iPod
Made for iPod

iPod nano :
- iPod nano (7th generation)
iPod touch :
- iPod touch (6th generation)
i Pod touch (5th generation)
iPhone :
- i Phone 5
- i Phone 5s
- i Phone 5c
- i Phone 6
- i Phone 6 Plus
- i Phone 6s
- i Phone 6s Plus
- i Phone SE
- i Phone 7
- i Phone 7 Plus

NOTE:
Some functions may not be available depending on the model of iPod.

iPod

Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless performance.
Apple, iPod nano, iPod touch, iPhone, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

AUX

“MEDIA” button

Display

NOTICE

Before connection, mute the unit, and also keep the volume of the auxiliary audio source within a range that will not cause distortion.
When the audio source is turned off, noise may be emitted. Be sure to turn off the unit or switch to another mode before turning off the audio source.

AUX selection

Touch the “MEDIA” button (1).

Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

NOTE:

Please consult your place of purchase for details about whether a given auxiliary audio source can be connected and the proper auxiliary cord to use.

Setting of Bluetooth® Devices

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“ENTER” button
BACK button
SETUP button
Bluetooth® button
Off-hook button

CAUTION
Do not register or set the Bluetooth® device while driving. Stop your vehicle in a safe area before registering the device.

Registration of Bluetooth® devices
To use Bluetooth® devices (Bluetooth® audio or mobile phone) on the audio system, it is required to register the Blue-tooth® devices to the audio system. Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered.

NOTE:

Certain functions cannot be used depending on the Bluetooth® device.
Refer to the user manual included with your device regarding the operation method of Bluetooth® devices.
If the pairing cannot be established, the connection operation is canceled.
For the Bluetooth® device pairing method, refer to the user manual included with your device or try pairing again.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
Touch the SETUP button (4).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2). From the panel button:
Touch the SETUP button (4).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- The passkey will be displayed.
Operate and register the Bluetooth® device.
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) incompatible Bluetooth® device:
Enter the passkey into the Bluetooth® device.
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) compatible Bluetooth® device:
Select “Yes” to register the Bluetooth® device.

It is possible to automatically register devices depending on the type of Blue-tooth® device.
NOTE:

If the Bluetooth® device contains music player and mobile phone function, both functions will be registered simultaneously. When deleting a Bluetooth® device, both functions will be deleted simultaneously.
If a mobile phone is not registered and the off-hook button (6) is pressed and the telephone mode is selected, it will automatically switch to “Pairing”.
When pairing with a mobile phone is established, it is possible to automatically transfer the phonebook and call history. If you wish to conduct an automatic transfer press “YES” and if not, press “NO”.

Set from the list of mobile phones The list of paired mobile phones is dis-played and the various settings can be changed.
The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
- Touch the SETUP button (4).
- Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “List Phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Connect a registered mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Phone” screen, select the name of the desired mobile phone, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Select”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Disconnect a connected mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Phone” screen, select the name of the desired mobile phone, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Disconnect”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Delete a registered mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Phone” screen, select the name of the desired mobile phone, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Delete”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Set from the Bluetooth® audio list The list of paired Bluetooth® audio is dis-played and the various settings can be changed.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
  From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “List Audio”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Connect a registered Bluetooth® audio

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Select”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Disconnect a registered Bluetooth® audio

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Disconnect”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Delete a registered Bluetooth® audio

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Delete”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Select a connection method
It is possible to switch connection methods when the Bluetooth® audio is registered to the audio system and the audio system and Bluetooth® audio are not connected.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Connect Method”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the connection method, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From Vehicle:
  Operate from the audio system to connect to the Bluetooth® device.
- From Audio:
  Operate from the Bluetooth® device to connect to the audio system.

Change of Passkey

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch
  Press the Bluetooth® button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Passkey”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select a number between 0 and 9, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Repeat this operation several times.
- Enter the passkey one digit by one digit.
- The passkey must be between 4 to 8 digits.
- In order to cancel the number that you entered and return to the previous digit, touch the BACK button (3).
- If you do not enter a number that is 4 or more digits and re-touch the “ENTER” button (2), the passkey will be registered.

Automatic connection with the Blue-tooth® device
If the “Bluetooth Power” is set to ON, turning the ignition switch to ACC will automatically connect the registered Bluetooth® device.

With the automatic connection, the Blue-tooth® device that was connected last will be prioritized.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth Power”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “On” or “Off”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

NOTE:

When “Bluetooth Power” is set to “OFF”, the audio system disconnects from the registered Bluetooth® device.
If “Bluetooth Power” is set to “Off”, the audio system will not automatically reconnect the next time the ignition is switched on.

The device status will be displayed

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
- Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth Info”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired status, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- To display the device name, select “Device Name”.
- To display the device address, select “Device Address”.

Initialize
It is possible to initialize the audio system’s Bluetooth® settings or device information.

CAUTION

Do not initialize the settings while driving. Stop your vehicle in a safe area before initializing the device.
Initialize with caution. Initialized settings and history cannot be restored.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Initialize”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the item that you want to initialize item, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- HF Sound Setting:
  - Reception/ringtone volume
  - Incoming call volume
- Vehicle Device Info:
  Passkey
- All Initialize:
  - Reception/ringtone volume
  - Incoming call volume
  - Bluetooth audio volume
  - Pairing registration
  - Phonebook/history
  - Speed dial
  - Connect Method
  - Bluetooth Power
  - Auto Transfer
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Notes on Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Blue-tooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Denso Ten Limited is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This telecommunication equipment con-forms to the requirements of the National Telecommunications Commission.
Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth® ready device whenever requested. This unit shares the communication frequency with other private or public wire-less communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless communication radios.
You should stop using this unit immediately whenever you are notified that your unit disturbs other wireless communication.

Profile

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing)
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
HFP (Hand-Free Profile)
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile)

Bluetooth® Hands-free (if equipped)
To use Bluetooth® devices (Bluetooth® audio or mobile phone) on the audio system, it is required to register the Blue-tooth® devices to the audio system by “Bluetooth Settings”.

Display

Steering switch

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
Speed dial button (1-6)
SETUP button
“VOLUME” button
BACK button
“ENTER” button
Bluetooth® setting button
Off-hook button
On-hook button
Mute button
“VOL” (volume) button

NOTICE

Do not leave your mobile phone inside your vehicle. If the temperature inside the vehicle increases, it may damage your mobile phone.
When disposing your vehicle, make sure to delete all personal information saved to the audio system.
The following hands-free data must be deleted from the audio system.
- Speed dial
- Reception history/Incoming call history
- Bluetooth® phonebook data

NOTE:

Please keep your phone volume low. The person’s voice who you are talking to may be heard outside of the vehicle and increase the voice echo. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone.
In the following cases, your voice may not be heard clearly by the person on the other line:
- When driving on unpaved roads. (If there is loud traffic noise.)
- When driving at high speeds.
- When driving with the window open.
- If the air conditioner is blowing directly towards the microphone.
- When the sound of the air conditioner fan is loud.
  When there is an adverse effect to the sound quality of the phone or network that you are using.
The audio system may not function under the following conditions.
- When the phone power is not turned on.
- When the mobile phone is out of service.
- When the mobile phone is not connected.
- When the mobile phone battery is low
The Bluetooth’s hands-free operation is dependent upon the mobile phone’s compatibility.
The Bluetooth’s hands-free performance is affected by the driving conditions of mobile phone networks, handsets and vehicles.
The audio system’s performance may be restricted due to the model of your mobile phone.

It is possible to register a mobile phone and register the phone number to the audio system as follows:

- Up to 1,000 phone numbers can be saved for every registered mobile phone.
  Up to 30 phone numbers can be saved to the call history menu (missed calls/incoming/outgoing calls.)
- When the call history exceeds 30 calls, they are deleted from the oldest one first, and the latest call history information is displayed in descending order.
- Up to 6 phone numbers can be saved to the speed dial list.

Answer the phone

Press the off-hook button (8).
- When you press the on-hook button (9) during an incoming call, you can block the call. (Only for compatible phone units)

NOTE:

If you receive a call from a registered phone, the caller’s name will appear on the screen.
If you receive a call from an unregistered phone, only the caller’s phone number will appear on the screen.

Hang up the phone

When the call is finished, press the on-hook button (9).

Make a call on call waiting
When the screen is displayed during a call, it is possible to hold the call and answer the other incoming call.

When an incoming call is received during a call, press the off-hook button (8).

When the call is on hold, it will connect to the other incoming call.
To end the call waiting, press the off-hook button (8).
When the call waiting is completed, the call on hold will connect.
When switching the caller, press the off-hook button (8) again while using the call waiting.

NOTE:
This function can only be used with phone units that are compatible with call waiting.

Mute the ringtone volume

Press the mute button (10).

To deactivate the mute volume, press the mute button (10).

Adjust the volume
Adjust the reception volume

Touch or slide the “VOLUME” button (4) or press the “VOL” button (11) during a call.
- To increase the volume, touch or slide upwards.
- To decrease the volume, touch or slide downwards.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “HF Sound Set-ting”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the item that you want to adjust, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- Call Volume: Reception/ringtone volume
- Ringtone Volume: Incoming call volume
Touch or slide the “VOLUME” button (4).
- To increase the volume, touch or slide upwards.
- To decrease the volume, touch or slide downwards.

Make a call
Press the off-hook button (8) to enter the telephone mode.

Use the phonebook

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Phonebook”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired initials, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the contact number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- If there are multiple phone numbers for a single contact, touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the phone number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select “Yes”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6) or press the off-hook button (8).

Use the call history

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “All Calls,” “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the contact number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Yes”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6) or press the off-hook button (8).

Use the speed dial

Press the Off-hook button (8) for 1 second or longer.
Touch the desired speed dial button (2)(1-6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/
Down button (1), select “YES”, and then touch the “ENTER” button (6) or press the Off-hook button (8).

NOTE:
Speed dial numbers must be registered before this function can be used.

Transfer/delete the phonebook

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Phone-book”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer all contacts from your mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Phonebook” screen, select “Add Contacts”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Overwrite All”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer 1 contact from your mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Phonebook” screen, select “Add Con-tacts”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Add One Con-tact”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Delete the registered phonebook

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Phonebook” screen, select “Delete Contacts”, and touch the “ENTER” but-ton (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired initials from the list or “All”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- When you select “All”, it will transition to step 4.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired name from the list, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer/delete the call history

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Call His-tory”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer the call history

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Call History” screen, select “Overwrite His-tory”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Delete the call history

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Call History” screen, select “Delete His-tory”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “All Calls”, “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the TUNE/TRACK Up/Down button (1), select the desired data from the history or select “All“, and then touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Registration / deletion of speed dial

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Speed Dials”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Registration in speed dial

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Speed Dials” screen, select “Add Speed Dial”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the phonebook or call history, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- When you select the call history, it will transition to step 4.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired initials from the list and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the contact number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- If there are multiple phone numbers for a single contact, touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the phone number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select the speed dial number that you want to register, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Deletion of speed dial

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Speed Dials” screen, select “Delete Speed Dials”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the speed dial number that you want to delete, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Automatic transfer of the phonebook/call history
When registering the mobile phone, you can select to automatically transfer the phonebook and call history from your device. Select according to the following steps.

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Auto Transfer”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “On” or “Off”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Bluetooth® Audio
To use Bluetooth® devices (Bluetooth® audio or mobile phone) on the audio system, it is required to register the Blue-tooth® devices to the audio system by “Bluetooth® Settings”.

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“DISP/ENTER” button
BACK button
“FLD” (group operation) button
SETUP (random/repeat) button
“MEDIA” button

Display

Playback time
Text information display

NOTE:
Some functions may not be usable on some Bluetooth® devices.
Selecting the Bluetooth® audio

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6).

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6). Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

Hold down the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1).
- Hold down the Up button for 1 second or longer to fast forward the track.
- Hold down the Down button for 1 second or longer to fast rewind the track.
- Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding.

Selecting a track

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).
- Touch the Up button to listen to the next track.
- When the Down button is touched once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Touch the Down button twice to listen to the previous track.

Selecting a group (only for supported models)

Touch the “FLD” (group operation) button (4).
Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).
- Touch the Up button to go to the next group.
- Touch the Down button to go to the previous group.

Repeat playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select “Repeat”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
- Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, display will change as follows:
  Off → One song repeat → Group repeat …

Random playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select “Random”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2)
- Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, display will change as follows:
  Off → One song repeat →
  Group repeat

Display change

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
- Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
  Artist name/Track title → Album name/ Track title…
  NOTE:
- “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there is no text information in the USB device currently being played.
- “…” is displayed if all text data cannot be displayed. Touch and hold the “DISP/
  ENTER” button (2) for at least one second to automatically display the rest of the text data.

Anti-Theft Feature
The anti-theft function is intended to dis-courage thefts, such as that the audio sys-tem becomes inoperable when it is installed on other vehicles.
This function works by entering a Personal Identification Number (PIN).
When the unit is disconnected from its power source, such as when the audio system is removed or the battery is disconnected, the unit will become inoperable until the PIN is reentered.

POWER button
List selection button
“ENTER” button
BACK button
PIN entry button (1-4)

Display

Setting the Anti-Theft Function

Touch the POWER button (1) for 1 second or longer to power off the audio system.
Hold down the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5) and the
“ENTER” button (3) and touch the POWER button (1).
- “SECURITY” will be displayed.
Hold down the Up button of the List selection button (2) and the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5).
- “—-” will be displayed.
Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] – [4] of the PIN entry button (5).
Touch the “ENTER” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- “COMPLETE” will be displayed, and the power will turns off after 3 seconds.

NOTE:
Take a note of the registered PIN and keep it for the future use.
Canceling the anti-theft feature
To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the registered PIN.

Touch the POWER button (1) for 1 second or longer to power off the audio system.
Hold down the buttons numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5) and the
“ENTER” button (3) and touch the POWER button (1).
- “PIN ENTRY” will be displayed.
Hold down the Up button of the List selection button (2) and the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5).
- “—-” will be displayed.
Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] – [4] of the PIN entry button (5).
Touch the “ENTER” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR* (ERR Number)” will be displayed for 3 seconds, then the audio system will go back to step 2.
- “—-” is displayed on the screen, and the power will turns off after 3 seconds.
  NOTE:
- To change your PIN, first delete your current PIN, then set a new one.
- If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times or more, “HELP” will be displayed and the audio system will become inoperable. In
  this case, contact a SUZUKI dealer.

Confirming the Personal Identification Number (PIN)
When the main power source is disconnected such as when the battery is replaced, etc, it is required to enter the PIN to make the unit operable again.

Set the ignition switch to the ACC position.
1. “SECURITY” will be displayed.
Hold down the Up button of the List selection button (2) and the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5).
- “—-” will be displayed.
Enter the registered 4-digit PIN number using the buttons numbered [1] – [4] of the PIN entry button (5).
Touch the “ENTER” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR* (ERR Number)” will be displayed for 3 seconds, then the audio system will go back to step 2.
- After 3 seconds, the power of the audio system will be turned off automatically and it will become operable again.

Steering Switch (if equipped)

Use the steering wheel button to operate the basic functions of the audio system

MODE button
Selection button
- Selecting the radio station
- Selecting the track (USB (iPod), Bluetooth
  ® audio mode)
- Mute button
- “VOL” (volume) button
  MODE button (1)
- Each time the button is pressed, the mode will change as follows:
  AM → FM1 → FM2 → USB (iPod) (if
  equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if
  equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

Selection button (2)

FM1, FM2, AM mode:
- Press > to transfer to the next preset channel.
- Press < to transfer to the previous preset channel.
- Press > for 1 second or longer, it will
  search for receivable stations at a high frequency.
Press < for 1 second or longer, it will search for receivable stations at a low frequency.
USB (iPod), Bluetooth® audio mode:
- Press > to transfer to the next song.
  With the folder operation mode, it will transfer to the next folder.
- Press < to return to the beginning of the currently playing song. Pressing it twice consecutively will return to the previous song.
  With the folder operation mode, it will return to the previous folder.
- Press > for 1 second or longer to fast forward the song.
  When the button is released, it will stop fast-forwarding.
- Press < for 1 second or longer to rewind the song.
  Releasing the button can stop rewinding.
Mute button (3)
Hands-free mode Each time you press the button the mute will switch from ON/OFF.
USB (iPod), Bluetooth® audio mode:

Press the button during playback to temporarily
stop the playback.
“VOL” button (4)

Hands-free mode:
- Press during an outgoing or ingoing call, the reception/ringtone sound will increase.
- Press during an outgoing or ingoing call, the reception/ringtone sound will decrease.
- Press during an outgoing call, the ringtone sound will increase.
- Press during an outgoing call, the ringtone sound will decrease.

Radio, USB (iPod), Bluetooth® audio,

AUX mode:
Press , the volume will increase.
Press , the volume will decrease.

Troubleshooting

When encountered a problem, check and follow the instructions as described below.
If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Problem

Possible cause

Possible solution

COMMON

Unable to operate

The security function is on.

When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter the ID. When “HELP” is displayed, contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Unable to turn on the power (no sound).

(No sound is produced)

Fuse is blown.

Contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work- shop.

Radio

Much noise	It may not be exactly tuned in to the station.	Tune it in exactly to the station.
Unable to receive by auto tuning	There may be no station emitting signals powerful enough.	Pick up a station by manual tuning.

USB

Playback does not start when the USB device is connected.

There is no supported format file to play on this unit.

Check the file format.

The current consumption of the USB device exceeds

1.0 A.

Use an USB device with a current consumption lower than 1.0 A.

Sound skips or noise produced

Sound skipping may occur when playing VBR (Vari- able Bit Rate) files.

It is not recommended to play VBR files.

Problem

Possible cause

Possible solution

Bluetooth

Pairing failed	The distance between this unit and the Bluetooth® ready device is too far, or a metallic object may be located between the Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.	Change the location of the Bluetooth® ready device.
Pairing failed	The Bluetooth® function of the Bluetooth® ready device is off.	Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth® ready device. (Some devices have the power saving function that automatically activates after a cer- tain time.)
Unable to receive a call	Your current location may be out of service area.	Drive your vehicle to the service area of the phone.
The voice quality of hands-free is low (Distortion, noise etc.)	Another wireless device may be located near the unit.	Switch off the wireless device or keep it away from the unit.

Error Display Messages
The following messages (flashing) will be displayed onto the screen depending on the condition of the audio system

Message

Description

Reading

When the USB device or iPod’s file format is being read,, this message will be displayed.

ERROR 1

When the USB device or iPod’s reading error occurs, this message will be displayed. Reconnect the USB device or iPod’s connection cable.

When the Bluetooth® audio playback malfunction occurs, this message will be displayed.

Check the Bluetooth® audio body.

Talk button (if equipped)

(1) Talk button

It can be used with a device having a voice recognition function. To use the function, it is necessary to perform a corresponding setting on your device. For operation of the audio system or the navigation system, refer to the supplementary manual provided along with it.

Importer: CFAO MOTORS TANZANIA LIMITED
Address: Pugu/Nyerere Road PO Box 40798 Dares Salaam Tanzania

Fuel Filler Cap

The fuel filler cap is located on the left rear side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever located on the outboard lower side of the driver’s seat and locked by simply closing the door.

To remove the fuel filler cap:

Stop the engine and close all the doors and windows while refueling.
Open the fuel filler door.
Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

CAUTION
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel may be under pressure and may spray out, causing injury.

NOTE:
The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap (2) by hooking the groove (3) when refueling.
To reinstall the fuel filler cap:

Turn the cap clockwise until you hear several clicks.
Close the fuel filler door.

WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not smoke when refueling, and make sure there are no open flames or sparks in the area.

WARNING
If you need to replace the fuel cap, use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of an improper cap can result in a malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system. It may also result in fuel leakage while driving and in the event of an accident.

Engine Hood

WARNING

Never allow children to open or close the hood. Children may injure themselves because the hood is heavy. Contact with the engine compartment and related parts may cause burns when this area/these parts are hot.
Do not allow children to be near the vehicle when opening the hood.
Do not leave tools, cloths, and other objects, which were used to clean or perform maintenance and inspections, in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause operational failures or even the vehicle to catch fire when the engine compartment becomes hot.

To open the engine hood:

Pull the hood release handle located under the driver’s side instrument panel in the outboard position. This will disengage the engine hood lock halfway.
Push the under-hood release lever upward with your finger, as shown in the illustration. While pushing the lever, lift up the engine hood.
CAUTION
The release lever and its peripheral, or engine hood can be hot enough to burn your finger right after driving. Touch after those becomes cool enough.
NOTICE
Check that the wiper arms are not raised before you lift up the engine hood to avoid damaging the wiper arms and the engine hood.
While holding the hood, pull the prop rod out from the holding clip, and then insert the end of the rod into the designated hole.
CAUTION
- The prop rod can be hot enough to burn your finger right after driving. Touch the rod after it becomes cool enough.
- Insert the end of the rod into the hole securely. If the rod slips out, you may get caught in the closing hood.
- The rod may slip out when the hood is blown by wind. Be careful on windy days.

NOTICE
Hold the part make in * when removing the bracket from the holder.

To close the engine hood:

Lift the hood up slightly and remove the prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod back to the holding clip.
Lower the hood to about 20 cm above the hood latch, and then let it drop down. Make sure the hood is securely latched after closing.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched before driving. If it is not, it can fly up unexpectedly during driving, obstructing your view and resulting in an accident.

CAUTION
To avoid injury, check that no part of the occupant’s body such as hands or head is in the path of the hood when closing it.

NOTICE
Pushing on the hood from the top may damage it.

Sun Visor

The sun visor can be pulled down to block glare coming through the windshield, or they can be unhooked and turned to the side to block glare coming through the side window.

NOTICE
When unhooking and hooking a sun visor, handle it by the hard plastic parts or the sun visor can be dam-aged.

Vanity mirror (if equipped)

(1) Vanity mirror

WARNING

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to failure to pay attention to the road in front of you.
Do not place any weight on or come to close to the locations where an airbag is stored when using a vanity mirror. Doing so may cause the airbag to deploy and cause serious injury due to the impact of the airbag.

Interior Light

This light switch has two positions which function as described below:

Front (Type A)

Front (Type B)

Rear

Interior light switch has three positions which function as described below:

ON (1)
The light comes on and stays on regard-less of whether the door is open or closed.

NOTE:
The light will automatically be turned off to prevent the lead-acid battery from dis-charging when the following conditions are simultaneously met:

The ignition switch is in “LOCK” position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF).
The hazard warning lights, the position lights and the headlights are off.
After 15 minutes from the light on.

DOOR (2)

The light comes on when the door is opened. After closing all doors, the light will remain on for about 15 seconds and then fade out. If you insert the key, or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” during this time, the light will start to fade out immediately. After removing the key from the ignition switch or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), the light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out.
When the ignition switch is in LOCK position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF), to prevent the battery from dis-charging, the light will automatically be turned off when a period of 15 minutes has elapsed after any of the doors (including the tailgate) is opened and other operations are not done.

OFF (3)
The light remains off even when the door is opened.

NOTE:
The number of doors involved in the lighting operation of the interior light depends on the vehicle specification. If there is a switch (rubber projection) at the door opening as shown, the door is involved in the lighting operation. The tailgate is also involved in this operation even without the rubber projection depending on the vehicle specification.

Accessory Socket (if equipped)

Center Console

Floor Console (if equipped)

The accessory socket will work when the ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” position. This socket can be used to provide 12 volt/ 120 watt/10 ampere power for electrical accessories.

NOTICE
Use of inappropriate electrical accessories can cause damage to your vehicle’s electrical system. Check that any electrical accessories you use are designed to plug into this type of socket.
Check that the cap remains on the socket when the socket is not in use.
When the ignition switch is in “LOCK” position during using the accessory socket, the unexpected situation may occur; the audio or navigation system does not turn off. If this occurs, disconnect the item from the accessory socket and check whether the electrical equipment work properly.
If the problem persists, ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer to have the system inspected.

Assist Grips

Front Passenger’s Seat / 2rd Ro
3rd Row Seat
Assist grips are provided for convenience.

NOTICE
To avoid damaging the assist grip and the molded headlining, do not hang down the assist grip.

Glove Box

To open the glove box, pull the latch lever. To close it, push the lid until it latches securely.

WARNING
Never drive with the glove box lid open. It could cause injury if an accident occurs.

WARNING
Do not leave cigarette lighters or spray cans in the glove box. If a cigarette lighter or spray can is in a place such as the glove box, it may light accidentally when luggage is loaded, causing a fire.

WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the lid of glove box open.

AUX/USB Socket (if equipped)

Connect your portable digital music player, etc. to this socket to enjoy music through the vehicle’s audio system. Refer to “Audio system (if equipped)” in this section.

NOTICE
Always close the cap when not in use, since entry of foreign material, dust, water, conductive liquids may damage the audio system or USB device.

WARNING
If you pay too much attention to operating the AUX/USB socket while driving, an accident may occur.

WARNING
Do not put items in the vehicle that may fall or roll around in the vehicle while driving. Objects getting caught in the brake pedal or accelerator pedal may prevent proper operation of the pedals, which may result in an accident.

Cup Holder and Storage Area

Front

Ventilated cup holder (if equipped)
If you turn on the air conditioning system, air flow comes out of the cup holder outlet. Air flow prevent the temperature of the drink from increasing.
Turn the dial wheel (1) clockwise, the cup holder outlet will open.
Turn the dial wheel(1) counterclockwise, the cup holder outlet will close.

NOTE:

The temperature of air flow in cup holder is about the same with the center outlet.
There is no effect to cool the drink in the cup holder.

3rd Row Seats

WARNING
Failure to take the precautions listed below could cause personal injury or vehicle damage.

Be careful when you are using the cup holders to hold a cup containing liquid. Spilling out hot liquid can cause burn injury.
Do not use the cup holders to hold sharpedged, hard, or breakable objects. Objects in the cup holders may be thrown about during a sudden stop or impact, and could cause personal injury.
Be careful not to spill liquid or insert any foreign materials into the moving part of the gearshift lever, or any electrical components. Liquid or foreign materials may dam-age these parts.
If you spill, or drop liquid accidentally, have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.
Bottle Holder
Front seats
2nd row seats

You should hold a bottle with a cap in the holder.

The rear armrest is stowed in the center of the seatback. Tilt it down forward to use.

WARNING
If the seat belt is obstructed by any part of the armrest when fastened, it cannot provide the intended protection. After fastening the seat belt, always check that the armrest is not interfering with the belt.

Bill/Coin Holder

WARNING
Never drive with the bill/coin holder lid open. It could cause injury if an accident occurs.

Footrest (if equipped)

Use the footrest (1) as a support for your left foot and body.

Front Seat Back Pocket (if equipped)

This pocket is provided for holding light and soft things such as gloves, newspapers or magazines.

CAUTION
Do not put hard or breakable objects in the pocket. If an accident occurs, objects such as bottles, cans, etc. can injure the occupants in the rear seat.

Luggage Box (if equipped)

Insert your hands into the notches and lift up the luggage box cover to use the box.

NOTICE
Do not allow items in the box to extend above the top of the box. Otherwise, the box or cover may be dam-aged.

NOTICE
Observe the following instructions, not to break the luggage box cover.

Do not hold open the cover while driving.
Do not apply any load to the cover while holding it open.

Roof Rails (if equipped)

Roof Rails

You can use the roof rails to attach the optional roof rack which is available at your SUZUKI dealer. If you use a roof rack, observe the instructions and precautions in this section and provided with the roof rack.

Check that the roof rack is securely installed.
To mount various types of cargo (such as skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit-able attachments which are available at your SUZUKI dealer. Install the attachments properly and securely according to the instructions provided. Do not mount cargo directly on the roof panel. The cargo can damage the roof panel.
The gross weight of the roof rack plus cargo must not exceed the loading capacity.
- Roof Rails: 50 kg (110 lbs)
  Also, do not let the gross vehicle weight (fully loaded vehicle including driver, passengers, cargo, roof load and trailer tongue weight) exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed in “SPECIFICATIONS” section.
Mount and secure the cargo onto the roof rack properly according to the instructions provided. Stow the heaviest items at the bottom and distribute the cargo as evenly as possible.
Do not carry large items that hang over the bumpers or the sides of the vehicle. Otherwise, these items could block your view.
Secure the front and rear ends of long items such as wood panels and surf-boards, to both the front and rear of the vehicle. You should protect the painted surfaces of the vehicle from scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.
Check periodically that the roof rack is securely installed and free from damage. Secure the front and rear ends of long items such as wood panels and surf-boards, to both the front and rear of the vehicle. You should protect the painted surfaces of the vehicle from scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.
Check periodically that the roof rack is securely installed and free from damage.

WARNING

Abrupt maneuvers or failure to properly secure cargo can allow the cargo to fly off the vehicle and hit others, causing personal injury or property damage.

Mount cargo securely and avoid abrupt maneuvers such as jackrabbit starts, sharp turns, fast cornering and sudden braking. Check periodically that cargo is securely fastened.

Large, bulky, long or flat items can affect vehicle aerodynamics or be caught by the wind, and can reduce vehicle control resulting in an accident and personal injury. Drive cautiously at a safely reduced speed when carrying this type of cargo.

Frame Hooks

It is not recommended that you use the frame hooks for towing another vehicle. They were originally designed to tow your vehicle in emergency situation.
If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to “Towing your vehicle” in “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.

WARNING
Observe the following instructions when using frame hooks. The towing eye or vehicle body may break and cause serious injury or damage:

Do not use the frame hooks for towing another vehicle.
Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out of severe snowy, muddy or sandy conditions, sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which could cause excessive stress on the towing eye.

In such case, we recommend that you contact a professional service.

Front

The towing eye (1) is provided on the front of the vehicle for use in emergency situations and sea shipping purpose only.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle, never use the towing eye (1) for trailer / train shipping.

Tools are stowed in the side of the luggage compartment. Remove the cover to access the tools.

Pick up the towing eye (1), jack handle (A) and wheel wrench (B) in the luggage compartment.
Remove the cover (C) by using a jack handle (A) covered with a soft cloth as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Do not use excessive force as it may dam-age the cover strap.
Install the towing eye (1) by hand.
NOTE:
It is recommended to secure the cover with tape to prevent damage during towing.
To tighten the towing eye (1), turn it clockwise by using a wheel wrench (B) until the towing eye (1) is securely installed.To remove the towing eye (1), reverse the installation procedure.

It is recommended to separate coins (2) and bills (3) with partition.
The holder can also be used after sliding out and removing the partition plate (1). Push the upper of the holder to close the cover.

Rear

The frame hook (2) is provided on the rear of the vehicle for use in emergency situations and sea shipping purposes only.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle, never use the frame hook (2) for trailer / train shipping.

Other Holes

The frame holes (3) are provided only for transporting by a car carrier trailer.

NOTICE
Do not use the frame holes (3) for towing purpose. These holes may break and cause serious injury or damage.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 User Manual
Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, Other Controls Equipment, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki New, Suzuki New ERTIGA, Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020

ERTIGA Suzuki

2018 Suzuki New ERTIGA Seats and Floor Mats Guide

2018 Suzuki New ERTIGA Seats and Floor Mats

The seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga are comfortable and flexible, so they can meet the needs of both the driver and the guests. With seven seats, there’s enough room for the whole family or a group of friends. The front seats are made to be adjustable so that both the driver and front passenger can find their perfect seating positions for a comfortable and enjoyable ride. Depending on the trim level and model, you may be able to get front seats that heat or cool. This adds a touch of comfort to your drive. In the middle row, a bench seat fits three people and, in some models, has a center armrest to make it even more comfortable. The two seats in the back row can be easily folded down to make more room for goods. This makes the New Ertiga a great choice for both daily errands and road trips. In addition to having comfortable seats, the car usually comes with cushioned floor mats to protect the floors inside. All-weather and rubber floor mats are choices for those who want more protection or customization, while custom or aftermarket mats let you add your own style to the cabin. Even the floor mats are easy to clean and maintain, making it simple to keep the inside of your 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga clean and cozy. Overall, the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga is a good choice for families and people who want a flexible and relaxing ride because it has well-designed seats and floor mat options.

For Safe Driving

Floor Mats

To prevent the driver’s side floor mat from sliding forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals, genuine SUZUKI floor mats are recommended. Whenever you put the driver’s side floor mat back in the vehicle after it has been removed, be sure to hook the floor mat grommets to the fasteners and position the floor mat properly in the footwell.
When you replace the floor mats in your vehicle with a different type such as all-weather floor mats, we highly recommend using genuine SUZUKI floor mats for proper fitting.

WARNING
Failure to take the following precautions may result in the driver’s side floor mat interfering with the pedals and causing a loss of vehicle control or an accident.

Make sure that the floor mat grommets are hooked to the fasteners.
Never stack additional floor mats on top of the existing floor mat.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s seat or seatback while driving. The seat or seatback could move unexpectedly, causing loss of control. Make sure that the driver’s seat and seatback are properly adjusted before you start driving.

WARNING
To avoid excessive seat belt slack, which reduces the effectiveness of the seat belts as a safety device, make sure that the seats are adjusted before the seat belts are fastened.

WARNING
Do not place any object under the front seat. If an object becomes caught under the front seat, the following may occur.

The seat will not be latched.
WARNING
Do not leave cigarette lighters or spray cans on the floor. If a cigarette lighter or spray can is on the floor, it may light accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

Adjusting Seat Position

The adjustment lever for each front seat is located under the front of the seat. To adjust the seat position, pull up on the adjustment lever and slide the seat forward or rearward.
After adjustment, try to move the seat for-ward and rearward to ensure that it is securely latched.

Adjusting Seat height (if equipped)

If the driver’s seat is equipped with a seat height adjuster lever on the outboard side of the seat, raise or lower the seat by pulling up or down the adjuster lever.

Adjusting Seatbacks

WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in an upright position when driving, or seat belt effectiveness may be reduced. Seat belts are designed to offer maximum protection when seatbacks are in the upright position.

To adjust the seatback angle of front seats, pull up the lever on the outboard side of the seat, move the seatback to the desired position, and release the lever to lock the seatback in place.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to the position which places the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. If this is not possible for very tall passengers, adjust the head restraint as high as possible.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed.
Do not attempt to adjust the head restraint while driving.

NOTE:
It may be necessary to recline the seat-back to provide enough overhead clearance to remove the head restraint.

To raise the front head restraint, pull upward on the restraint until it clicks. To lower the restraint, push down on the restraint while holding in the lock lever. If a head restraint must be removed (for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in the lock lever and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Rear Seats

Seat Adjustment

WARNING
To avoid excessive seat belt slack, which reduces the effectiveness of the seat belts as a safety device, make sure that the seats are adjusted before the seat belts are fastened.

Adjusting Seat Position (for 2nd row seats)

The adjustment levers for 2nd row seats are located under the front of the seats. To adjust the seat position, pull up on the adjustment lever and slide the seat forward or rearward.
After adjustment, try to move the seat forward and rearward to ensure that it is securely latched.

NOTICE
When the 3rd row seat is folded forward, adjust the 2nd row seat not to reach the 3rd row seat.

Adjusting Seatbacks

For 2nd row seats

To adjust the seatback angle of 2nd row seats, pull up the lever on the outboard side of the seat, move the seatback to the desired position, and release the lever to lock the seatback in place.

For 3rd row seats

To adjust the seatback angle of 3rd row seats, lift up the release lever, move the seatback to the desired position, and return the lever to lock the seatback in place.

Walk-in Type Seats (for 2nd row seats)

NOTE:
To enter to or exit from the 3rd row seat, insert the tongue plate of the buckle into the part (1) before moving the 2nd row seat.

The walk-in type seat can be moved to provide easy entry to and exit from the 3rd row seats. You can move a walk-in seat by lifting up the release lever and pushing the seatback forward.

WARNING

After using the walk-in function, be sure to return the folded seat back to an upright position.
Before returning a walk-in seat to its normal seating position, make sure that the feet of the passenger in the 3rd row seat are out of the way.
After returning the seat to its normal seating position, make sure it is securely latched.

Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case of an accident.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed.
Do not attempt to adjust the head restraint while driving.

NOTE:
It may be necessary to fold forward the seatback to provide enough overhead clearance to remove the head restraint.
Adjust the head restraint to the position which places the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. If this is not possible for very tall passengers, adjust the head restraint as high as possible.

2nd row side seats

2nd row center seat (if equipped)

3rd row seats

To raise the rear head restraint, pull upward on the restraint until it clicks. To lower the restraint, push down on the restraint while holding in the lock lever. If a head restraint must be removed (for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in the lock lever and pull the head restraint all the way out.
When installing a child restraint system, raise the head restraint to the most upper position.

Folding Rear Seats
The rear seat of your vehicle can be folded forward to provide additional cargo space.

2nd row seats
To fold the 2nd row seat forward:

Insert the tongue plate of the buckle into the part (1).
NOTICE
- When you move a seatback, make sure the tongue plate of the buckle is inserted in the seat belt catch hole so the seat belts are not caught by the seatback, seat hinge, or seat latch. This helps prevent damage to the belt system.
- Make sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
Lower the head restraint fully.
Store the seat belt buckles in the seat cushion slit.
Pull up the lever on the outboard side of the seat, and fold the seatback forward.

NOTICE
When the 2nd row seat head restraint reaches the front seatback, slide the front seat forward.

WARNING
If you need to carry cargo in the passenger compartment with the 2nd row seatback folded forward, be sure to secure the cargo or it may be thrown about, causing injury. Never pile cargo higher than the seatback.

To return the seat to the normal position, follow the procedure below.

NOTICE
When you move a seatback, make sure the tongue plate of the buckle is inserted in the seat belt catch hole so the seat belts are not caught by the seatback, seat hinge, or seat latch. This helps prevent damage to the belt system.

Raise the seatback until it locks into place.

NOTE:
When the seatback is locked in the folded position, pull up the lever on the outboard side of the seat to unlatch the seatback.
After returning the seat, try moving the seatback to make sure they are securely latched.

3rd row seats
To fold the 3rd row seat forward:

Lower the head restraint fully.
Stow the seat belt buckles of the right and left seating position into the pocket of the seat cushion as shown in the illustration.
Lift up the release lever on the top of seat, and fold the seatback forward.

NOTICE
When the 3rd row seat head restraint reaches the 2nd row seatback, slide the 2nd row seat forward.

NOTICE
When you are not using a seat belt, stow the seat belt buckles of the right and left seating position into the pocket first. This helps prevent being caught by the seat and being damaged.

WARNING
If you need to carry cargo in the passenger compartment with the 3rd row seatback folded forward, be sure to secure the cargo or it may be thrown about, causing injury. Never pile cargo higher than the seatback.

To return the seat to the normal position, follow the procedure below.

Raise the seatback until it locks into place.
When you raise the seat from back of it, pull the strap (1).

NOTICE
Do not allow items in the luggage box to extend above the top of the luggage box. Otherwise, the luggage box or cover may be damaged.

After returning the seat, try moving the seatback to make sure they are securely latched.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems

WARNING
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.

WARNING
An airbag supplements, or adds to, the frontal collision protection offered by seat belts. The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained by wearing seat belts at all times, whether or not an airbag is mounted at their seating position, to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision.

WARNING
Do not modify, remove, disassemble seat belts. Doing so may prevent them from functioning properly and cause the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Never allow persons to ride in the cargo area of a vehicle. In the event of an accident, there is a much greater risk of injury for persons who are not riding in a seat with their seat belt securely fastened.
Seat belts should always be adjusted as follows:
- The lap portion of the belt should be worn low across the pelvis, not across the waist.
- The shoulder straps should be worn on the outside shoulder only, and never under the arm.
- The shoulder straps should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

WARNING

Seat belts should never be worn with the straps twisted and should be adjusted as tightly as is comfortable to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will provide less protection than one which is snug.
Check that seat belt latch plate (tongue) is inserted into the proper buckle especially in the rear seats. It is not possible to insert into the wrong buckles in the rear seats.

WARNING

Pregnant women should use seat belts, although specific recommendations about driving should be made by the woman’s medical advisor. Remember that the lap portion of the belt should be worn as low as possible across the hips, as shown in the diagram.
Do not wear your seat belt over hard or breakable objects in your pockets or on your clothing. If an accident occurs, objects such as glasses, pens, etc. under the seat belt can cause injury.
WARNING
Never use the same seat belt on more than one occupant and never attach a seat belt over an infant or child being held on an occupant’s lap. Such seat belt use could cause serious injury in the event of an accident.
Periodically inspect seat belt assemblies for excessive wear and damage. Seat belts should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated, or damaged in any way. It is essential to replace the entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact, even if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in the rear seat.
Infants and small children should never be transported unless they are properly restrained. Restraint systems for infants and small children can be purchased locally and should be used. Make sure that the system you purchase meets applicable safety standards. Read and follow all the directions provided by the manufacturer.

WARNING

For child, if the seat belt irritates the neck or face, use a child restraint system appropriately for the child. The seat belts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult size.
Avoid contamination of seat belt webbing by polishes, oils, chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water.
Do not insert any items such as coins, clips, etc. into the seat belt buckles, and be careful not to spill liquids into these parts. If foreign materials get into a seat belt buckle, the seat belt may not work properly.
All seatbacks should always be in an upright position when driving, or seat belt effectiveness may be reduced. Seat belts are designed to offer maximum protection when seatbacks are in the upright position.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) The seat belt has an emergency locking retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock the seat belt only during a sudden stop or impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt across your body very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back to unlock it, and then pull the belt across your body more slowly.

Safety Reminder

NOTE:
The word “CENTER” is marked into the buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles are designed so a latch plate cannot be inserted into the wrong buckle.

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the buckle and retract the belt slowly while attaching a hand to the belt or/and the latch plate.

Lap Belt (for Some Vehicles)

Sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten the belt, pull the latch plate attached to the seat belt across your hips and press it straight into the buckle until you hear a “click”. To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt during a collision, position the belt across your lap as low on your hips as pos-sible and adjust it to a snug fit.
To tighten the belt, pull the free end of the belt across alongside the lap strap.

To lengthen, release the latch plate from the buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) in the direction of the arrow. The latch plate should then be refitted into the buckle and the belt tightened as previously described.

NOTE:
The word “CENTER” is marked into the buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles are designed so a latch plate cannot be inserted into the wrong buckle.

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the driver or front passenger does not buckle his or her seat belt, the driver’s seat belt reminder light in the instrument cluster will come on or brink and a buzzer will sound as a reminder to the driver or front passenger to buckle his or her seat belt. For more details, refer to the explanation below. If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled when the ignition switch is turned “ON” or pushed to “ON” mode, the reminder works as follows:

The driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt reminder light will come on.
After the vehicle’s speed has reached about 15 km/h, the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt reminder light will blink and a buzzer will sound for about 95 seconds.
After step 2) has finished, the reminder light will remain on until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
If the driver or front passenger has buckled his or her seat belt and later unbuckles the seat belt, the reminder system will be activated from step 1) or step 2) according to the vehicle’s speed. When the vehicle’s speed is below about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from step 1). When the vehicle’s speed is above about 15 km/h, the reminder will start from step 2).
The reminder will be automatically canceled when the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled or the ignition switch is turned off, or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF).

WARNING
It is absolutely essential that the driver and passengers fasten their seat belts at all times. Persons who are not fastening seat belts have a much greater risk of injury if an accident occurs. Make a regular habit of buckling your seat belt before putting the key in the ignition or pressing the engine switch.

NOTICE
The sensor of the front passenger’s seat belt reminder is located in the seat cushion. Therefore, if you spill liquid such as liquid aromatics, soft drinks or juice on the front passenger’s seat cushion, immediately wipe it dry with a soft cloth. Otherwise, the sensor of the front passenger’s seat belt reminder can be damaged.

NOTE:
If you put an object on the passenger’s seat, the weight of the object will be sensed by the sensor and the front passenger’s seat belt reminder light will come on and then the interior buzzer may beep.
If a child or a small-sized person sits on the front passenger’s seat or the cushion is put on the front passenger’s seat, the weight will not be sensed by the sensor and the interior buzzer may not beep.

Seat Belt Catch Hole (for 2nd Row Seats)

NOTE:
To enter or exit from the 3rd-row seat, insert the tongue plate of the buckle into part (1) before moving the 2nd-row seat.

Seat Belt Inspection

Periodically inspect the seat belts to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors, anchorages, and guide loops. Replace any seat belts which do not work properly or are damaged.

WARNING
Inspect all seat belt assemblies after any collision. Any seat belt assembly which was in use during a collision (other than a very minor one) should be replaced, even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. Any seat belt assembly which was not in use during a collision must be replaced if the airbags and the seat belt pretensioners are activated. The airbags, the pretensions, and the load limiter will only function once. In case they did not activate, consult with a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Child Restraint Systems

The following types of child restraint systems are available generally.

Infant restraint – rear seat only

Child restraint

Booster seat

SUZUKI highly recommends that you use a child restraint system to restrain infants and small children. Many different types of child restraint systems are available; check that the restraint system you select meets applicable safety standards. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats either by seat belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower anchor bars built into the seat. Whenever possible, SUZUKI recommends that child restraint systems be installed on the 2nd-row seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions than in front seating positions. If you must use a front-facing child restraint in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the passenger’s seat as far back as possible.

NOTE:
Observe any statutory regulations about child restraints.

You may find this label on the sun visor.

WARNING
Do not install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the passenger’s front airbag inflates, a child in a rear-facing child restraint could be killed or severely
injured. The back of a rear-facing child restraint would be too close to the inflating airbag.

WARNING
If you install a child restraint system in the 2nd-row seat, slide the seat and installed the child restraint system as far back as possible. So that the child’s feet do not contact the front
seatback. These will help avoid injury to the child in the event of an accident.

WARNING
Children could be endangered in a collision if their child restraint systems are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions
below. secure the child in the restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Child Restraint System

CAUTION
Adjust the height of the head restraint or remove it for fitting the child restraint, as necessary. However, if a booster cushion not equipped with the head restraint is fitted, the seat head restraint should not be removed. If the head restraint is removed for fitting the child restraint, you need to install it again after removing the child restraint. If the child restraint is fitted improperly, a child sitting in it could be injured in a collision. (Refer to the “Installation with lap-shoulder seat belts” section, “Installation with ISOFIX type anchorages” section, and “Installation of child restraint with top tether” section in this section for details.).

Child Restraint (for the 2nd Row Center Seat Type with the Lap Belt)

The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for the carriage of children and the fitting of the child restraint system is shown in the table below. Child restraint systems suitability for each seat position.

NOTE:
The above illustration shows Right handle drive vehicle. Seat position number of, and is same as Right handle drive vehicle for Left handle drive vehicle.

Front passenger’s seat
2nd seat right side
2nd seat left side
3rd seat right side
3rd seat left side

Seat position No.	Marking	NOTICE
		1), 2), 3)
,		2), 3)

,

Marking	Description
	It is suitable for the universal category of child restraint systems fixed with the vehicle seat belt.
	It is suitable for the ISOFIX child restraint system.
	This seat is equipped with a Top tether anchorage point.
	Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on the passenger seat.
	It is not suitable for a child restraint system.

NOTICE

Move the front seat fully rearward.
When you install a front-facing child restraint, if there is a gap or space between the child restraint and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle in order to install the child restraint system properly.
If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system, adjust the height of the head restraint or remove it, as necessary.

Seat position number	Seating position
Seat position number
Seating position suitable for universal belted (YES/NO)	YES1)	YES	NO	YES	NO	NO
i-Size seating position (YES/NO)	NO	NO	NO	NO	NO	NO
Seating position suitable for lateral fixture (L1/L2)	NO	X	NO	X	NO	NO
Suitable rear-facing fixture (R1/R2/R3)	NO	R1,R2,R3	NO	R1,R2,R3	NO	NO
Suitable front-facing fixture (F2X/F2/F3)	NO	F2X,F2,F3	NO	F2X,F2,F3	NO	NO

NOTE:
When installing the child restraint systems, only a front-facing child restraint is suitable.

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table

YES =Suitable for this seating position
NO = Not suitable for this seating position
X =ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this fixture.

If your child restraint system has no size class (or if you cannot find information in the following table), refer to the child restraint system suitability information for the vehicle or ask the retailer of your child seat.

Mass group	Size class	Fixture	Description
0 (up to 10 kg)	F	L1	Left Lateral facing position Child Restraint Systems (carry-cot)
	G	L2	Right Lateral facing position Child Restraint Systems (carry-cot)
	E	R1	Rear-facing seat
0+ (up to 13kg)	E	R1	Rear-facing seat
	D	R2	Reduced-Size rear-facing toddler Child Restraint Systems
	C	R3	Full-Size rear-facing toddler Child Restraint Systems
I (9kg to 18kg)	D	R2	Reduced-Size rear-facing toddler Child Restraint Systems
	C	R3	Full-Size rear-facing toddler Child Restraint Systems
	B	F2	Reduced-Height front-facing toddler Child Restraint Systems
	B1	F2X	Reduced-Height front-facing toddler Child Restraint Systems
	A	F3	Full-Height front-facing toddler Child Restraint Systems
II (15kg to 25kg)	X	X	–
III (22kg to 36kg)	X	X	–

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table
X = There is no fixture for this mass group

Installation with Lap-Shoulder

CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the head restraint, adjust the height of the head restraint or remove it for fitting the child restraint, as necessary. However, if a booster cushion not equipped with the seatback is fitted, the seat head restraint should not be removed. If the head restraint is removed for fitting the child restraint, you need to install it again after removing the child restraint. If the child restraint is fitted improperly, a child sitting in it could be injured in a collision.

NOTE:
Stow the removed head restraint in the luggage compartment so it will not cause inconvenience to the occupants.

ELR type belt

Whenever possible, SUZUKI recommends that child restraint systems be installed on the 2nd-row seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions than in front seating positions.

If you must install the child restraint system on the front passenger’s seat, follow the instructions below.
- - Slide the seat to the rear position by the seat position adjustment lever.
  - If there is a gap or space between the child restraint and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle in order to install the child restraint system properly.

Install your child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Check that the seat belt is securely latched.
Move the child restraint system in all directions to check that it is securely installed. When you put your child in the child restraint system, appropriately slide the front seat forward not to touch a part of your child’s body.

Installation with ISOFIX Type Anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with the lower anchorages in the 2nd-row seat outboard seating positions for securing ISOFIX type of child restraints with the connecting bars. The lower anchorages are located where the rear of the seat cushion meets the bottom of the seatback.

WARNING
Install the ISOFIX type of child restraint(s) in the only outboard seating positions, not in the central position for the 2nd-row seat. Install the ISOFIX-type child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. After installation, try moving the child restraint system in all directions especially forward to check that connecting bars are securely latched to the anchorages.

Your vehicle is equipped with the top tether anchorages. Use the top tether strap of the child restraint according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Here is a general instruction:

NOTE:
Stow the removed head restraint in the luggage compartment so it will not cause inconvenience to the occupants.

Place the child restraint in the 2nd row seat, inserting the connecting bars to the anchorages between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Use your hands to carefully align the connecting bar tips with the anchorages. Take care not to pinch your fingers.
Grasp the front of the child restraint and push the child restraint forcefully to latch the connecting bars.
Check that they are securely latched by trying to move the child restraint system in all directions, especially forward.
Attach the top tether strap referring to the “Installation of the child restraint with top tether” section.
When you put your child in the child restraint system, appropriately slide the front seat forward not to touch a part of your child’s body.
Push the child restraint toward the anchorages so that the connecting bar tips are partially hooked to the anchorages. Use your hands to confirm the position.
NOTICE
When installing a child restraint system to the 2nd-row seat, slide the seat installed the child restraint system as far back as possible.

Installation of Child Restraint with Top Tether

NOTE:
Stow the removed head restraint in the luggage compartment so it will not cause inconvenience to the occupants.

Some child restraint systems require the use of a top tether strap. Top tether anchorage brackets are provided in your vehicle at the locations shown in the illustrations. The number of the top tether anchorage brackets provided in your vehicle depends on the vehicle’s specification. Install the child restraint system as follows:

Secure the child restraint on the 2nd-row seat using the procedure described above for securing a restraint system that does not require a top tether strap.
Hook the top tether strap to the top tether anchorage bracket and tighten the top tether strap according to the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Attach the top tether strap to the corresponding top tether anchorage bracket located directly behind the child restraint.
When routing the top tether strap, pass the top tether strap as shown in the illustration. (Refer to the “Head restraints” section for details on how to adjust the height of the head restraint or remove it.)
Check that cargo does not interfere with the routing of the top tether strap.

NOTICE
When installing a child restraint system to the 2nd-row seat, slide the seat installed to the child restraint system as far back as possible.

Seat Belt Pretensioner System

WARNING
This section describes your SUZUKI vehicle’s seat belt pretensioner system. Read and follow all these instructions carefully to minimize your risk of severe injury or death.

To determine if your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt pretensioner system at the front seating positions, check the label on the seat belt at the bottom part. If the letters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illustrated, your vehicle is equipped with the seat belt pretensioner system. You can use the pretensioner seat belts in the same manner as ordinary seat belts.
Read this section and the “Supplemental restraint system (airbags)” section to learn more about the pretensioner system.
The seat belt pretensioner system works with the supplemental restraint system (air bags). The collision sensors and the electronic controller of the airbag system also control the seat belt pretensioners. The pretensioners are triggered only when there is a frontal collision severe enough to trigger the airbags and the seat belts are fastened. For precautions and general information including servicing the pretensioner system, refer to the “Supplemental restraint system (airbags)” section in addition to this “Seat belt pretensioner system” section, and follow all those precautions.
The pretension is located in each front seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tightens the seat belt so the belt fits the occupant’s body more snugly in the event of a frontal collision. The retractors will remain locked after the pretensioners are activated. Upon activation, some noise will occur and some smoke may be released.

These conditions are not harmful and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
The driver and all passengers must be properly restrained by fastening seat belts at all times, whether or not a pretension is equipped at their seating position, to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision.
Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn low across the pelvis, not across the waist. Please refer to “Seat adjustment” section and the instructions and precautions about the seat belts in this “Seat belts and child restraint systems” section for details on proper seat and seat belt adjustments.
Please note that the pre tensioners along with the airbags will activate in severe frontal collisions. They are not designed to activate in rear impacts, roll-overs, or minor frontal collisions. The pretensions can be activated only once. If the pretensions are activated (that is, if the airbags are activated), have the pretensioner system serviced by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

If the AIRBAG light on the instrument cluster does not blink or come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned “ON” or pushed to “ON” mode, stays on for more than 10 seconds, or comes on while driving, the pre-tensioner system or the airbag system may not work properly. Have both systems inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible?
Service on or around the pretensioner system components or wiring must be performed only by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop who is specially trained. Improper service could result in unintended activation of pretensions or could render the pre-tensioner inoperative. Either of these two conditions may result in personal injury.
To prevent damage or unintended activation of the pretensions, check that the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch has been in LOCK position or the ignition mode has been LOCK (OFF) for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your SUZUKI vehicle.
Do not touch pre tensioner system components or wiring. The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow. When scrapping your SUZUKI vehicle, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop, body repair shop, or scrap yard for assistance.

Supplemental Restraint System (Airbags)

WARNING
This section of the owner’s manual describes the protection provided by your SUZUKI’s SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (airbags). Please read and follow ALL these instructions carefully to minimize your risk of severe injury or death in the event of a collision.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System consisting of the following components in addition to a lap-shoulder belt at each front seating position.

Driver’s front airbag module
Front passenger’s front airbag module
Seat belt pre-tensioners
Airbag controller
Forward collision sensor

AIRBAG light

If the AIRBAG light on the instrument cluster does not blink or come on when the ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” position, or the AIRBAG light stays on, or comes on while driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the airbag system inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Front Airbags

The front airbag is designed to inflate in severe frontal collisions when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The front airbag is not designed to inflate in rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or minor frontal collisions, since they would offer no protection in those types of accidents. Remember, since an airbag deploys only one time during an accident, seat belts are needed to restrain occupants from further movements during the accident. Therefore, an airbag is not a substitute for seat belts. To maximize your protection, always fasten your seat belts. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident.

Driver’s front airbag

Front passenger’s front airbag

The driver’s front airbag is located behind the center pad of the steering wheel and the passenger’s front airbag is located behind the passenger’s side of the instrument panel.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the airbag covers to identify the location of the airbags.

WARNING
Do not install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the passenger’s front airbag inflates, a child in a rear-facing child restraint could be killed or severely injured. The back of a rear-facing child restraint would be too close to the inflating airbag.

WARNING
If the airbag stored place is damaged or cracked, the airbag system may not work properly, which could result in serious injury in the event of a collision. Have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Refer to “Seat belts and child restraint systems” section for details on securing your child.

Conditions of front airbags deployment (inflation)

Frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform at more than about 25 km/h (15 mph)
Strong impact equivalent to frontal collision such as above at left and right angles of about 30 degrees (1) or less from the front of your vehicle

Frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform at more than about 25 km/h (15 mph)
The strong impact is equivalent to a frontal collision such as above at left and right angles of about 30 degrees (1) or less from the front of your vehicle.

Conditions of front airbags may inflate
Receiving a strong impact to the lower body of your vehicle, the front airbags may inflate.

Hitting a curb or medial strip
Front airbags may inflate
Receiving a strong impact to the lower body of your vehicle, the front airbags may inflate.
Hitting a curb or medial strip.Falling into a deep hole or ditch.
Landing hard or falling.
Front airbags may not inflate
The front airbags may not inflate when a strong impact has not occurred since the collision object was easy to be deformed or moved, or the collided portion of your vehicle was easy to be deformed. Also, front airbags may not inflate in many cases when the collision angle is greater than about 30 degrees at left and right angles from the front of your vehicle.
Frontal collision to a stopped vehicle at less than about 50 km/h (30 mph).
The collision that the front of your vehicle goes under the bed of a truck etc.
Collision with a utility pole or stumpage.
Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail at left and right angles of greater than about 30 degrees (1) from the front of your vehicle.
Frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform at less than about 25 km/h (15 mph).

Front airbags do not inflate
Front airbags do not inflate in rear impacts, side impacts or rollovers, etc. However, these might inflate in a strong impact.

The impact from the rear.The impact from the side.
Vehicle rollover

Airbag symbol meaning

You may find this label on the sun visor.

WARNING
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

WARNING
If the AIRBAG light in the instrument cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced immediately, because the airbags may not offer the protection for which they were designed.

NOTE:
For the label of Mexico and Thailand models, refer to “For Mexico” and “For Thailand” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.

How the System Works

In a frontal collision, the collision sensors will detect rapid deceleration, and if the controller judges that the deceleration represents a severe frontal collision, the controller will trigger the inflators. The inflators inflate the appropriate airbags with nitrogen or argon gas. The inflated airbags provide a cushion for your head and upper body. The airbag inflates and deflates so quickly that you may not even realize that it has been activated. The airbag will neither hinder your view nor make it harder to exit the vehicle.

Airbags must inflate quickly and forcefully in order to reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable consequence of the quick inflation is that the airbag may irritate bare skin, such as the facial area against a front airbag. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. Also, upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and some powder and smoke will be released. These conditions are not harmful and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Be aware, however, that some airbag components may be hot for a while after inflation.

A seat belt helps keep you in the proper position for maximum protection when an airbag inflates. Adjust your seat as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the steering wheel or dashboard. Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” section and the “Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems” in this section for details on proper seat and seat belt adjustments.

WARNING
The driver should not lean over the steering wheel. The front passenger should not rest his or her body against the dashboard or otherwise get too close to the dashboard. In these situations, the out-of-position occupant would be too close to an inflating airbag and may suffer severe injury.

Do not attach any objects to, or place any objects over, the steering wheel or dashboard. Do not place any objects between the airbag and the driver or front passenger. These objects may interfere with airbag operation or may be propelled by the airbag in the event of a collision. Also, these objects may move when you start moving the vehicle or while the vehicle is moving, and they may interfere with the driver’s view or safe driving. Each condition may cause severe injury. Do not strike or apply significant levels of impact to the airbag component areas. It can cause the airbags to malfunction.

WARNING

Do not modify the system in any way including replacing the steering wheel, placing stickers on the steering wheel pad, painting the steering wheel, or covering the steering wheel with a cover.
Do not place stickers on or paint the instrument panel. Do not install and set up accessories, air fresheners, ETC readers, or portable navigation systems. Do not stand umbrellas or similar in front of airbags.
Excluding genuine Suzuki parts, do not attach accessories to the front windshield or the rearview mirror.
Note that even though your vehicle may be moderately damaged in a collision, the collision may not have been severe enough to trigger the airbags to inflate. If your vehicle sustains ANY front-end or side damage, have the airbag system inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to ensure it is in proper working order.

Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module that records information about the airbag system if the airbags deploy in a collision. The module records information about the overall system status, which sensors activated the deployment, and for a certain vehicle only, whether the driver’s seat belt was in use.

Servicing the airbag system
If the airbags inflate, have the airbags and related components replaced by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and the driver’s floor is submerged, the airbag controller could be damaged. If it does, have the airbag system inspected by the SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Special procedures are required for servicing or replacing an airbag. For that reason, only a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work-shop should be allowed to service or replace your airbags. Please remind anyone who services your SUZUKI that it has airbags.
Service on or around airbag components or wiring must be performed only by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. Improper service could result in unintended airbag deployment or could render the airbag inoperative. Either of these two conditions may result in severe injury.
To prevent damage or unintended inflation of the airbag system, be sure the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch has been in the LOCK position for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your SUZUKI. Do not touch airbag system components or wires. The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow for easy identification.
Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflated airbag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer, body repair shop or scrap yard for help with disposal.

Exhaust Gas Warning

WARNING
Avoid breathing exhaust gases. Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a potentially lethal gas that is colorless and odorless. Since carbon monoxide is difficult to detect by itself, be sure to take the following precautions to help prevent carbon monoxide from entering your vehicle.

Do not park with the engine running for a long period of time, even in an open area. If it is necessary to sit for a short time in a parked vehicle with the engine running, make sure the air intake selector is set to “FRESH AIR” and the blower is at high speed.
Avoid operating the vehicle with the tailgate or trunk open. If it is necessary to operate the vehicle with the tailgate or trunk open, make sure all windows are closed, and the blower is at high speed with the air intake selector set to “FRESH AIR”.
To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s ventilation system, keep the air inlet grille in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves or other obstructions at all times.
Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear of snow and other material to help reduce the buildup of exhaust gases under the vehicle. This is particularly important when parked in blizzard conditions.
Have the exhaust system inspected periodically for damage and leaks. Any damage or leaks should be repaired immediately.

FAQ

How many seats does the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga have?

The 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga typically comes with seven seats arranged in a 2-3-2 configuration, including two front seats, a middle-row bench seat, and a rear-row bench seat.

What is the material used for the seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga?

The seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga are typically upholstered in fabric, although higher trim levels may offer leather or leatherette options.

Are the seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga adjustable?

Yes, the front seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga are typically adjustable to allow for driver and passenger comfort.

Is there a center armrest in the middle-row bench seat?

Some versions of the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga may come with a center armrest for the middle-row bench seat, but this feature can vary by trim level.

Can the rear-row seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga be folded down for additional cargo space?

Yes, the rear-row seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga are typically designed to be folded down to create more cargo space in the trunk area.

What is the seating capacity for each row of seats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga?

The front row typically seats two passengers, the middle row seats three passengers, and the rear row seats two passengers.

Do the front seats of the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga come with heating or cooling options?

Heating and cooling options for the front seats may be available in certain trim levels or as optional features, but this can vary by market and specific model.

Are floor mats included as standard equipment in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga?

Floor mats are often included as standard equipment in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga, but the type and quality of mats can vary by trim level.

What material are the standard floor mats made of?

Standard floor mats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga are typically made of durable carpet material to protect the vehicle’s flooring.

Can you get all-weather or rubber floor mats for the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga?

Yes, all-weather or rubber floor mats are often available as accessories or may come with higher trim levels to protect against dirt, water, and other elements.

Are custom or aftermarket floor mats available for the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga?

Yes, there are typically custom or aftermarket floor mats available in various materials, designs, and colors for those who want to personalize or upgrade their mats.

Do the rear rows of the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga come with floor mats?

In most cases, the rear rows of the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga will come with floor mats to provide protection and comfort for all passengers.

Are floor mats easy to clean in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga?

Floor mats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga are designed to be relatively easy to clean. They can typically be removed, shaken out, and vacuumed or spot-cleaned as needed.

Can you replace damaged or worn floor mats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga?

Yes, if the floor mats in the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga become damaged or worn, they can usually be replaced with new mats either from the dealership or aftermarket sources.

Do the floor mats have retention clips or hooks to keep them in place?

Some versions of the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga may come with retention clips or hooks to help keep the floor mats securely in place and prevent them from sliding around.

Useful Link

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 Ignition Key Reminder User Manual

Tags Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, ERTIGA 2018, Floor Mats, Safe Driving, Seat Belts, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki New ERTIGA

CARRY Suzuki

Suzuki New CARRY 2019 Air Conditioning System User Manual

Air Conditioning System

Description of Controls

Temperature selector with air conditioning switch
Blower speed selector

Temperature Selector with Air Conditioning Switch
This is used to adjust the temperature. Also, this is used to turn on and off the air conditioning system by turning the selector. To turn on the air conditioning system, turn the selector to a position other than “OFF”. When this selector is in “OFF”, the air conditioning system will not turn on.

Blower Speed Selector
This is used to turn on the blower and to select blower speed.

NOTE:
During operation of the air conditioner, you may notice slight changes in engine speed. These changes are normal, the system is designed so that the compressor turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature.
Less operation of the compressor results in better fuel economy.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.

Radio Antenna (If Equipped)

The radio antenna can be inserted into the body or pulled out.

NOTICE
To avoid damage to the radio antenna, insert the antenna into the body in below cases.

Using an automatic car wash.
The antenna hits anything such as a low ceiling in a parking garage.
Putting a car cover over your car.

Installation of Radio Frequency Transmitters

NOTE:
When you intend to use Radio Frequency (RF) transmitting equipment in your vehicle, refer to “Installation of Radio Frequency (RF) Transmitting Equipment” in the end of this book.

NOTICE
Improper installation of mobile communication equipment such as cellular telephones, CB (Citizen’s Band) radios or any other wireless transmitters may cause electronic interference with your vehicle’s ignition system or any other electrical systems resulting in vehicle performance problems. Consult a SUZUKI dealer or qualified service technician for advice.

Audio System (If Equipped)

Safety Information
WARNING
If you pay too much attention to operating the audio system or watching the audio system display while driving, an accident can occur. If you set the sound volume too loud, it could prevent you from being aware of road and traffic conditions.

Keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive. Avoid pay-ing too much attention to operating the audio system or watching the audio system display.
Familiarize yourself with the audio system controls and operation of the audio system before driving.
Preset your favorite radio stations before driving so that you can quickly tune to them using the presets.
Set the sound volume to a level that will allow you to continue to be aware of surrounding road and traffic conditions while driving.
Getting Started
Basic Operations

“MUTE”
“SRC” (source)/“OFF”
“BAND/ ”
Display window
USB port
“M.C.” (multi-control) dial
DISP” (display)/“DISP OFF”
AUX input jack (3.5 mm stereo jack)

Frequently used operations

Purpose	Operation
Turn on the power	Press “SRC/OFF” to turn on the power. Press and hold “SRC/OFF” to turn off the power.
Adjust the volume	Turn the “M.C.” dial. Press “MUTE” to mute the unit. Press “MUTE” again or turn the “M.C.” dial to unmute.
Select a source	Press “SRC/OFF” repeatedly.
Change the display information	Press “DISP/DISP OFF” repeatedly. Press and hold “DISP/DISP OFF” to turn off the display information.
Return to the previous display/list	Press “BAND/ ”.
Return to the normal display from the menu	Press and hold “BAND/ ”.

Display Indication

Indication	Description
	Appears when a lower tier of the menu or folder exists.
	Appears when the “ ” button is pressed.
LOC	Appears when the local seek tuning function is set (P.5-24).
TP	Appears when a traffic program is received.
TA	Appears when the TA (traffic announcements) function is set (P.5-24).
S Rtrv	Appears when the sound retriever function is set (P.5-26).
	Appears when random/shuffle play is set.
	Appears when repeat play is set.
	Appears when the iPod control function is set (P.5-17).

Reference Links

View Full User Guide : Suzuki New CARRY 2019 User Manual
Download Manuals : https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags air conditioner, Air Conditioning System, Auto User Guide, Carry, Other Controls Equipment, Suzuki, Suzuki Carry, Suzuki New CARRY

CARRY Suzuki

Suzuki New CARRY 2019 System Operating User Manual

System Operating Instructions

Quick heating (using recirculated air)
The base settings are the same as for nor-mal heating except you select RECIRCU-LATED AIR. If you use this heating method for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated and the windows can become misty. Therefore, use this method only for quick heating and change to the normal heating method as soon as possible.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heating
Select BI-LEVEL and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Unless the temperature selector is in the fully cold position or fully hot position, the air that comes out of the centre and side outlets will be cooler than the air that comes out of the floor outlets.

Quick cooling (using recirculated air)
The base settings are the same as for nor-mal cooling except you select RECIRCU-LATED AIR and the highest blower speed.
NOTE:

If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated and the windows tend to get misted. Therefore, you should select FRESH AIR whenever possible.
If your vehicle has been left in the sun with the windows closed, it will cool faster if you open the windows briefly while you operate the air conditioner with the air intake selector at FRESH AIR and the blower at high speed.

NOTE:
Because the air conditioner dehumidifies the air, turning it on will help keep the windows clear, even when blowing heated air using DEFROST or HEAT & DEFROST functions.

NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting:

Select DEFROST and FRESH AIR,
Set the blower speed selector to high,
Adjust the temperature selector to the hot end,
Turn on “A/C” switch, and
Adjust the side outlets so the air blows on the side windows.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.

Air Conditioning System (Right Hand Drive Vehicle) (If Equipped)

Side outlet
Centre outlet

Air Outlet

Move the knob (1) horizontally or the case (2) vertically to adjust the direction of air flow as desired.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide : Suzuki New CARRY 2019 User Manual
Download Manuals : https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, Operating Instructions, Other Controls Equipment, Suzuki, Suzuki New, Suzuki New CARRY, Suzuki New CARRY 2019, System Operating

CARRY Suzuki

Suzuki New CARRY 2019 Cleaning Interior User Manual

Cleaning Interior

Leather upholstery

Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution, wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth. To remove soap, wipe the areas again with a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions. Do not use solvent type cleaners or abrasive cleaners.

NOTE:

In order to keep leather upholstery looking good, it should be cleaned at least twice a year.
If leather upholstery becomes wet, immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper or a soft cloth. Water may cause leather to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off.
When parking on sunny days, select a shady place or use a sunshade. If leather upholstery is exposed to direct sunlight for a long time, it may discolor and shrink.

As is common with natural materials, leather is inherently irregular in grain and cowhide has spots in its natural state. These do not affect the performance of the leather in any way.

Vinyl upholstery
Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-gent mixed with warm water. Apply the solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to loosen dirt.
Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt and the soap solution. If some dirt still remains on the surface, repeat this procedure.

Fabric upholstery
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap solution, rub stained areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas again with a cloth dampened with water. Repeat this until the stain is removed, or use a commercial fabric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions.

Seat belts
Clean seat belts with a mild soap and water. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts. They may weaken the fabric in the belts.

Vinyl floor mats
Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl with water or mild soap. Use a brush to help loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened, rinse the mat thoroughly with water and dry it in the shade.

Carpets
Remove dirt and soil as much as possible with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap solution, rub stained areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas again with a cloth dampened with water. Repeat this until the stain is removed, or use a commercial carpet cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions.

Instrument panel and console Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezed damp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirt is removed.

NOTICE
Do not use chemical products that contain silicon to wipe electrical components such as the air conditioning system, audio, navigation system, or other switches. These will cause damage to the components.

NOTICE
Liquid such as liquid aromatics, soft drinks or juice may cause dis-coloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper or a soft cloth.
Do not leave leather products with color, fur or vinyl products, etc. in your vehicle for long periods. It may cause discoloration or deterioration of interior.

Cleaning Exterior

NOTICE
It is important that your vehicle be kept clean and free from dirt. Failure to keep your vehicle clean may result in fading of the paint or corrosion to various parts of the vehicle body.

Caring for Aluminum Wheels NOTE:
Do not use an acidic or alkaline detergent, or a cleaner containing petroleum solvent to wash aluminum wheels. These types of cleaner will cause permanent spots, discoloration and cracks on finished surfaces and damage to center caps. Do not use a bristle brush and soap containing an abrasive material. These will damage finished surfaces.

Washing

WARNING
Never attempt to wash and wax your vehicle with the engine running.
When cleaning the underside of the body and fender, where there may be sharp-edged parts, wear gloves and a long-sleeved shirt to protect your hands and arms from being cut.
After washing your vehicle, care-fully test the brakes before driving to make sure they have maintained their normal effectiveness.

Washing by hand

When washing the vehicle, park it in the place where direct sunlight does not fall on it as much as possible and follow the instructions below:

Flush the underside of body and wheel housings with pressurized water to remove mud and debris. Use plenty of water.
NOTICE
- Avoid directing steam or hot water of more than 80°C (176°F) on plastic parts.
- To avoid damaging engine components, do not use pressurized water in the engine compartment.
Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.
Remove dirt and mud from the body exterior with running water. You may use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use hard materials which can scratch the paint or plastic. Remember that the headlight covers or lenses are made of plastic in many cases.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the paint or plastic surface, do not wipe the dirt off without ample water. Follow the above procedure.
Wash the entire exterior with a mild detergent or car wash soap using a sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or cloth should be frequently soaked in the soap solution.
NOTICE
When using a commercial car wash product, observe the cautions specified by the manufacturer. Never use strong household detergents or soaps.
Once the dirt has been completely removed, rinse off the detergent with running water.
Wipe off the vehicle body with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it to dry in the shade.
Check carefully for damage to painted surfaces. If there is any damage, touch up the damage following the procedure below:
Clean all damaged spots and allow them to dry.
Stir the paint and touch up the dam-aged spots lightly using a small brush.
Allow the paint to dry completely.

Washing by an automatic car wash

NOTICE
If you use an automatic car wash, make sure that your vehicle’s body parts, such as an antenna, cannot be damaged. If you are in doubt, consult the car wash operator for advice.

Washing by a high-pressure cleaner

NOTICE
If you use a high-pressure cleaner, keep away the nozzle from your vehicle sufficiently.

Bringing the nozzle to your vehicle too close or pointing the nozzle to the opening of front grill or bumper etc. can cause damage and mal-function of the vehicle body and parts.
Pointing the nozzle to door glasses and door frames can allow water to enter the cabin.
After washing the vehicle, waxing and polishing are recommended to further protect and beautify the paint.

Only use waxes and polishes of good quality.
When using waxes and polishes, observe the precautions specified by the manufacturers.
Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Appearance Care, Auto User Guide, Cleaning Interior, Suzuki, Suzuki New, Suzuki New CARRY, Suzuki New CARRY 2019

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 Servicing the Airbag System User Manual

Servicing the airbag system

If the airbags inflate, have the airbags and related components replaced by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and the driver’s floor is submerged, the airbag controller could be damaged. If it does, have the airbag system inspected by the SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Special procedures are required for servicing or replacing an airbag. For that reason, only a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work-shop should be allowed to service or replace your airbags. Please remind any-one who services your SUZUKI that it has airbags.
Service on or around airbag components or wiring must be performed only by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. Improper service could result in unintended airbag deployment or could render the airbag inoperative. Either of these two conditions may result in severe injury.
To prevent damage or unintended inflation of the airbag system, be sure the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch has been in the LOCK position for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on your SUZUKI. Do not touch airbag system components or wires. The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow for easy identification.
Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflated airbag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer, body repair shop or scrap yard for help with disposal.

Exhaust Gas Warning

WARNING
Avoid breathing exhaust gases. Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is colorless and odorless. Since carbon monoxide is difficult to detect by itself, be sure to take the following precautions to help prevent carbon monoxide from entering your vehicle.

Do not park with the engine running for a long period of time, even in an open area. If it is necessary to sit for a short time in a parked vehicle with the engine running, make sure the air intake selector is set to “FRESH AIR” and the blower is at high speed.
Avoid operating the vehicle with the tailgate or trunk open. If it is necessary to operate the vehicle with the tailgate or trunk open, make sure all windows are closed, and the blower is at high speed with the air intake selector set to â€œFRESH AIRâ€.
To allow proper operation of your vehicleâ€™s ventilation system, keep the air inlet grille in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves or other obstructions at all times.
Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear of snow and other material to help reduce the buildup of exhaust gases under the vehicle. This is particularly important when parked in blizzard conditions.
Have the exhaust system inspected periodically for damage and leaks. Any damage or leaks should be repaired immediately.

Keys

- Your vehicle comes with a pair of identical keys. Keep the spare key in a safe place. One key can open all of the locks on the vehicle.
  The key identification number is stamped on a metal tag provided with the keys or on the keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will need this number to have new keys made. Write the number below for your future reference.

KEY NUMBER:

Immobilizer System

- This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft by electronically disabling the engine starting system.
  The engine can be started only with your vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key or keyless push start system remote controller, which has an electronic identification code programmed in it. The key or remote controller communicates the identification code to the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned “ON” or pushed to “ON” mode. If you need to make spare keys or remote controllers, see a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. The vehicle must be programmed with the correct identification code for the spare. A key made by an ordinary locksmith will not work.
Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, For Safe Driving, Servicing the Airbag System, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki New, Suzuki New ERTIGA, Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 SUPPLEMENT User Manual

SUPPLEMENT

For Mexico

Fuel
Your vehicle requires regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum rating of 87 pump octane ((R + M)/2 method). In some areas, the only fuels that are available are oxygenated fuels.
Oxygenated fuels which meet the minimum octane requirement and the requirements described below may be used in your vehicle without jeopardizing the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:
Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain oxygen-carrying additives such as MTBE or alcohol.

Gasoline-ethanol blends
Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol (grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, may be used in your vehicle if the ethanol content is not greater than 10%.

Fuel Pump Labeling
In some states, pumps that dispense oxygenated fuels are required to be labeled for the type and percentage of oxygenate and whether important additives are present. Such labels may provide enough information for you to determine if a particular blend of fuel meets the requirements listed above. In other areas, pumps may not be clearly labeled as to the content or type of oxygenate and additives. If you are not sure that the fuel you intend to use meets these requirements, check with the service station operator or the fuel supplier.

NOTE:
To help clean the air, SUZUKI recommends you use the oxygenated fuels. However, if you are not satisfied with the driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle when you are using an oxygenated fuel, switch back to the regular unleaded gasoline.

NOTICE
Be careful not to spill fuel containing alcohol while refueling. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up immediately. Fuels containing alcohol can cause paint damage, which is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Air Bag Symbol Meaning

You may find this label on the sun visor.

Tyre Rotation

5-tyre rotation

4-tyre rotation

To avoid uneven wear of your tyres and to prolong their life, rotate the tyres as illustrated. Tyres should be rotated as recommended in the periodic maintenance schedule. After rotation, adjust front and rear tyre pressures to the specification listed on your vehicle’s Tyre Information Label.

Vehicle Identification

Chassis Serial Number

The chassis and/or engine serial numbers are used to register the vehicle. They are also used to assist a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop when ordering or refer-ring to special service information. When-ever you have occasion to consult a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop, remember to identify your vehicle with this number. Should you find the number difficult to read, you will also find it on the identification plate.

Engine Serial Number

The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.

For Chile

Fuel
To avoid damaging catalytic converter, you must use unleaded gasoline with an octane number (RON) of 90 or higher. This is identified by a label attached on fuel lid that states: “UNLEADED FUEL ONLY”, “NUR UNVERBLEITES BENZIN”, “ENDAST BLYFRI BENSIN”, “SOLO GAS-OLINA SIN PLOMO” or “KHUSUS BEN-SIN TANPA TIMBAL”.

Gasoline-ethanol blends
Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol (grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are commercially available in certain areas. Blends of this type may be used in your vehicle if they are no more than 10% ethanol. Make sure this gasoline-ethanol blend has octane ratings no lower than those recommended for the gasoline.

NOTE:
If you are not satisfied with the driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle when you use a gasoline-alcohol blend, you should switch back to unleaded gasoline containing no alcohol.

NOTICE
The fuel tank has an air space to allow for fuel expansion in hot weather. If you continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off or an initial blowback occurs, the air chamber will become full. Exposure to heat when fully fuelled in this manner will result in leakage due to fuel expansion. To prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off, or when initial vent blowback occurs, if using an alternative non-automatic system.

For Thailand

Gasoline/Ethanol blends
Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol (grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are commercially available in certain areas. Blends of this type may be used in your vehicle if they are no more than 20% ethanol.
Make sure this gasoline-ethanol blend has octane ratings no lower than those recommended for the gasoline.

NOTE:
If you are not satisfied with the driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle when you use a gasoline/alcohol blend, you should switch back to unleaded gasoline containing no alcohol.

Gasoline containing MTBE
Unleaded gasoline containing MTBE (methyl tertiary butyl ether) may be used in your vehicle if the MTBE content is not greater than 15%. This oxygenated fuel does not contain alcohol.

Air Bag Symbol Meaning

You may find this label on the sun visor.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, ERTIGA SUPPLEMENT, New ERTIGA, Supplement, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 SPECIFICATIONS User Manual

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

Chassis Serial Number

The chassis serial number is stamped on the panel under the seat. Raise the carpet (1) and then check the chassis serial number. The chassis and/or engine serial numbers are used to register the vehicle. They are also used to assist a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop when ordering or referring to special service information. Whenever you have occasion to consult a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop, remember to identify your vehicle with this number. Should you find the number difficult to read, you will also find it on the identification plate.

NOTE:
For the Chassis serial number of GCC countries’ models, refer to “For GCC Countries” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.

Engine Serial Number

The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.

Fuel

Gasoline Engine
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter, you must use unleaded gasoline with an octane number (RON) of 90 or higher. This is identified by a label attached near the fuel cap that states: “UNLEADED FUEL ONLY”.

NOTE:
If you are not satisfied with the drivability or fuel economy of your vehicle when you use a gasoline-alcohol blend, you should switch back to unleaded gasoline containing no alcohol.

NOTICE
The fuel tank has an air space to allow for fuel expansion in hot weather. If you continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off or an initial blowback occurs, the air chamber will become full. Exposure to heat when fully fueled in this manner will result in leakage due to fuel expansion. To prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling after the filler nozzle has automatically shut off, or when initial vent blowback occurs if using an alternative non-automatic system.

NOTICE
Be careful not to spill fuel containing alcohol while refueling. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle’s body, wipe it up immediately. Fuels containing alcohol can cause paint damage, which is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:

For the fuel recommendation of Argentina models, refer to “For Argentina” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.
For the fuel recommendation of Bolivia and Peru model, refer to “For Bolivia and Peru” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.
For the fuel recommendation of Thailand models, refer to “For Thailand” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.

NOTE:
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm (in.)
Overall length		4195 (165.1)
Overall width		1765 (69.5)
Overall height		1910 (75.2)
Wheelbase		2205 (86.8)
Track	Front	1465 (57.7)
	Rear	1460 (57.5)
Ground clearance		160 (6.3)

ITEM: Mass (weight) UNIT: kg (lbs)
Curb mass (weight)		1045-1100 (2303-2425)
Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating		2010 (4431)
Permissible maximum Axle Weight	Front	1030 (2270)
	Rear	1340 (2954)

NOTE:
For the dimensions and mass (weight) of Pakistan models, refer to “For Pakistan” in the “SUPPLEMENT” section.

ITEM: Engine
Type	K15B (DOHC)
Number of cylinders	4
Bore	74.0 mm (2.91 in.)
Stroke	85.0 mm (3.34 in.)
Piston displacement	1462 cm³ (1462 cc, 89.2 cu.in)
Compression ratio	10.0 : 1

ITEM: Electrical
Standard spark plug	NGK KR6A-10
Battery	12V 34B19L
Fuses	See the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

ITEM: Lights		WATTAGE	BULB No.
Headlight		12V 60W/55W	H4
Turn signal light	Front	12V 21W	WY21W
Turn signal light	Rear	12V 21W	P21W
Position light		12V 5W	W5W
Tail/brake light		12V 21/5W	P21/5W
License plate light		12V 5W	W5W
Reversing light		12V 21W	P21W
Interior light		12V 5W	–
Daytime running light (if equipped)		12V 13W	P13W
Rear fog light (if equipped)		12V 21W	P21W
High-mount stop light (if equipped)		12V 16W	W16W

ITEM: Wheels and Tyres
Tyre size, front and rear	165/80R13 94/93 N LT*1
Rim size	13X5 J
Tyre pressures	For the specified tyre pressure, see the Tyre Information Label located on the driver’s door lock pillar.

If you cannot prepare tyres with the specified load index rate and speed symbol, prepare tyres with a higher load index rate and speed symbol.

ITEM: Capacities (approx.)
Coolant (including reservoir tank)	For vehicles without a heating system	4.1 L (7.2 lmp pt)
	For vehicles with a heating system	4.9 L (10.4 lmp pt)
Fuel tank		43 L (9.5 Imp gal)
Engine oil		3.6 L (6.4 Imp pt) (replacement with oil filter)
Transmission oil		1.9 L (3.3 Imp pt)
Differential oil		2.1 L (3.7 Imp pt)

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 User Manual
Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, ERTIGA SPECIFICATIONS, New ERTIGA, Specifications, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 APPEARANCE CARE User Manual

Suzuki New 2018 AERTIG APPEARANCE CARE User Manual

APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion Prevention

It is important to take good care of your vehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listed below are instructions for how to maintain your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please read and follow these instructions carefully.

Important Information about Corrosion

Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture, or chemicals in hard-to-reach areas of the vehicle underbody or frame.
Chipping, scratches and any damage to treated or painted metal surfaces resulting from minor accidents or abrasion by stones and gravel.

Environmental conditions which accelerate corrosion

Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea breeze or industrial pollution will all accelerate the corrosion of metal.
High humidity will increase the rate of corrosion particularly when the temperature range is just above the freezing point.
Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle for an extended period of time may pro-mote corrosion even though other body sections may be completely dry.
High temperatures will cause an accelerated rate of corrosion to parts of the vehicle which are not well-ventilated to permit quick drying.

This information illustrates the necessity of keeping your vehicle (particularly the underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It is equally important to repair any damage to the paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.

How to Help Prevent Corrosion

Wash your vehicle frequently
The best way to preserve the finish on your vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to keep it clean with frequent washing. Wash your vehicle at least once during the winter and Wash your vehicle frequently once immediately after the win-ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean and dry as possible. If you frequently drive on salted roads, your vehicle should be washed at least once a month during the winter. If you live near the ocean, your vehicle should be washed at least once a month throughout the year.

For washing instructions, refer to “Vehicle Cleaning” section.

Repair finish damage
Carefully examine your vehicle for damage to the painted surfaces. Should you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through to the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair.

Keep passenger and luggage compartments clean
Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate under the floor mats and may cause corrosion. Occasionally, check under these mats to ensure that this area is clean and dry. More frequent checks are necessary if the vehicle is used for off-road driving or in wet weather.
Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertilizers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely corrosive by nature. These products should be transported in sealed containers. If they are spilled or leaked, clean and dry the area immediately.

Park your vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated area
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated area. If you often wash your vehicle in the garage and place it there in wet condition, your garage may be damp. The high humidity in the garage may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet vehicle may corrode even in a heated garage if the ventilation is poor.

WARNING
Do not apply additional undercoating or rust preventive coating on or around exhaust system components such as the catalytic converter, exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be started if the undercoating substance becomes overheated.

Vehicle Cleaning

WARNING
When cleaning the interior or exterior of the vehicle, do not use flammable solvents such as lacquer thinners, gasoline and benzene. Also, do not use cleaning materials such as bleaches and strong household detergents. The materials could cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle.

Cleaning Interior
Leather upholstery
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution, wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth. To remove soap, wipe the areas again with a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions. Do not use solvent type cleaners or abrasive cleaners.

NOTE:

In order to keep leather upholstery looking good, it should be cleaned at least twice a year.
If leather upholstery becomes wet, immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper or a soft cloth. Water may cause leather to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off.
When parking on sunny days, select a shady place or use a sunshade. If leather upholstery is exposed to direct sunlight for a long time, it may discolor and shrink.
As is common with natural materials, leather is inherently irregular in grain and cowhide has spots in its natural state. These do not affect the performance of the leather in any way.

Seat belts
Clean seat belts with a mild soap and water. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts. They may weaken the fabric in the belts.

Instrument panel and console Remove
loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezed damp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirt is removed.

Cleaning Exterior

NOTICE
It is important that your vehicle be kept clean and free from dirt. Failure to keep your vehicle clean may result in fading of the paint or corrosion to various parts of the vehicle body.

Washing

WARNING

Never attempt to wash and wax your vehicle with the engine running.
When cleaning the underside of the body and fender, where there may be sharp-edged parts, wear gloves and a long-sleeved shirt to protect your hands and arms from being cut.
After washing your vehicle, care-fully test the brakes before driving to make sure they have maintained their normal effectiveness.
Washing by hand

When washing the vehicle, park it in the place where direct sunlight does not fall on it as much as possible and follow the instructions below:

Flush the underside of body and wheel housings with pressurized water to remove mud and debris. Use plenty of water.
NOTICE
- Avoid directing steam or hot water of more than 80°C (176°F) on plastic parts.
- To avoid damaging engine components, do not use pressurized water in the engine compartment.
Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.
Remove dirt and mud from the body exterior with running water. You may use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use hard materials which can scratch the paint or plastic. Remember that the headlight covers or lenses are made of plastic in many cases.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the paint or plastic surface, do not wipe the dirt off without ample water. Follow the above procedure.
Wash the entire exterior with a mild detergent or car wash soap using a sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or cloth should be frequently soaked in the soap solution.
NOTICE
When using a commercial car wash product, observe the cautions specified by the manufacturer. Never use strong household detergents or soaps.
Once the dirt has been completely removed, rinse off the detergent with running water.
Wipe off the vehicle body with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it to dry in the shade.
Check carefully for damage to painted surfaces. If there is any damage, touch up the damage following the procedure below:
Clean all damaged spots and allow them to dry.
Stir the paint and touch up the dam-aged spots lightly using a small brush.
Allow the paint to dry completely.

Washing by an automatic car wash

NOTICE
If you use an automatic car wash, make sure that your vehicle’s body parts, such as an antenna, cannot be damaged. If you are in doubt, consult the car wash operator for advice.

Washing by a high-pressure cleaner

NOTICE
If you use a high-pressure cleaner, keep away the nozzle from your vehicle sufficiently.

Bringing the nozzle to your vehicle too close or pointing the nozzle to the opening of front grill or bumper etc. can cause damage and mal-function of the vehicle body and parts.
Pointing the nozzle to door glasses and door frames can allow water to enter the cabin.

Waxing

After washing the vehicle, waxing and polishing are recommended to further protect and beautify the paint.
Only use waxes and polishes of good quality.
When using waxes and polishes, observe the precautions specified by the manufacturers.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Appearance Care, Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, ERTIGA APPEARANCE CARE, New ERTIGA, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 EMERGENCY SERVICE User Manual

EMERGENCY SERVICE

Tyre Changing Tool

Jack
Wheel wrench
Jack handle

The tyre changing tools are stowed in the side of the luggage compartment. Remove the cover to access the tools.

To remove the jack (1), turn its shaft counterclockwise by using jack handle (3) and pull the jack out of the storage bracket.

NOTE:
If you are difficult to use the jack handle (3), use jack handle and wheel wrench (2) as shown in the illustration.

To stow the jack, place it in the storage bracket and turn the shaft clockwise with hand.

After temporarily holding the jack (1) until it contacts the storage bracket, turn the shaft (4) approximately 90° to 180° by using jack handle (3) to securely hold the jack in place.

WARNING
After using the tyre changing tools, stow them securely or they can cause injury if an accident occurs.

CAUTION
The jack should be used only to change wheels. It is important to read the jacking instructions in this section before attempting to use the jack.

The spare tyre is stowed under the rear floor.
To remove the spare tyre:

Remove the cap and use a wheel wrench to loosen the hook bolt of the spare tyre holder. Then, rotate using the end of the jack handle.
NOTICE
Loose the spare tyre holder hook bolt until you can remove the hook by yourself. If the bolt is loosen too much, the hook might off and the spare tyre might drop off to the ground.
Unhook the spare tyre holder and lower it slowly.
Remove the tyre.

To install the spare tyre:

Install the spare tyre facing up the outside of the wheel in the reverse order of removal.
Tighten the spare tyre holder hook bolt securely.

WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle with the loose spare tyre holder hook bolt, otherwise it may come loose or the spare tyre may drop off, which can result in an accident.

NOTICE
Tighten the spare tyre holder hook bolt securely. However, do not over-tighten the bolt, it may be warped or broken.

Tightening torque for the spare tyre holder hook bolt
30 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 22.1 lb-ft)

Jacking Instructions

Place the vehicle on level, hard ground. Set the parking brake firmly and shift into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has an automatic transmission, or shift into “R”
(Reverse) if your vehicle has a manual transmission.

WARNING

Shift into “P” (Park) for an automatic transmission, or into “R” (Reverse) for a manual transmission vehicle when you jack up the vehicle.
Never jack up the vehicle with the transmission in “N” (Neutral). Otherwise, unstable jack may cause an accident.
Turn on the hazard warning switch if your vehicle is near traffic.
Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the wheel being lifted.
Place the spare tyre near the wheel being lifted as shown in the illustration in case the jack slips.

Position the jack at an angle as shown in the illustration and raise the jack by turning the jack handle clockwise until the jack-head groove fits around the jacking bar beneath the vehicle body.
Continue to raise the jack slowly and smoothly until the tyre clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle more than necessary.

WARNING

Use the jack only to change wheels on level, hard ground.
Never jack up the vehicle on an inclined surface.
Never raise the vehicle with the jack in a location other than the specified jacking point (shown in the illustration) near the wheel to be changed.
Especially, do not raise the vehicle with a jack at a part of the torsion beam which is located under the vehicle body, between rear wheels.
Make sure that the jack is raised at least 51 mm (2 inches) before it contacts the flange. Use of the jack when it is within 51 mm (2 inches) of being fully collapsed may result in failure of the jack.
Never get under the vehicle when it is supported by the jack.
Never run the engine when the vehicle is supported by the jack and never allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.

Raising Vehicle with Garage Jack

Apply the garage jack to one of the points indicated below.
Always support the raised vehicle with jack stands (commercially available) at the points indicated below.

Front
Jack stand
Jacking point for onboard jack
Rear
Front suspension frame
Jacking point for garage jack
Application point for two-column lift and jack stand.

NOTICE
Never apply a garage jack to the exhaust pipe or engine undercover and rear torsion beam.
When you apply a garage jack to the rear jacking point, it may interfere with the rear bumper depending on the shape of the garage jack.

NOTE:
For more details, please contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Changing Wheels
To change a wheel, use the following procedure:

Remove the jack, tools and spare wheel from the vehicle.
Loosen, but do not remove the wheel nuts.
Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking instructions in this section).

WARNING
Shift into “P” (Park) for an automatic transmission, or into “R” (Reverse) for a manual transmission vehicle when you jack up the vehicle.
Never jack up the vehicle with the transmission in “N” (Neutral). Otherwise, unstable jack may cause an accident.

CAUTION
Immediately after the vehicle has been driven, the wheels, the wheel nuts and the area around the brakes might be extremely hot. Touching these areas may cause burn injury. Do not touch these areas, immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.
Clean any mud or dirt off from the surface of the wheel (1), hub (2), thread part (3) and the surface of the wheel nuts
with a clean cloth. Clean the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving.
Install the new wheel and replace the wheel nuts with their cone-shaped end facing the wheel. Tighten each nut snugly by hand until the wheel is securely seated on the hub.
Tightening torque for wheel nuts 100 Nm (10.2 kg-m, 74.0 lb-ft)
Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts with a wheel wrench in numerical order as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten them to the specified torque as soon as possible after changing wheels. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts may come loose or fall off, which can result in an accident. If you do not have a torque wrench, have the wheel nut torque checked by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

After Changing Wheels
Stow the tyre-changing tools (jack, jack handle and lug wrench) in place. Also, stow the flat tyre in the spare tyre stowed position. Refer to “Tyre Changing Tool” in this section.

NOTICE
Repair or replace the flat tyre immediately. If the flat tyre is placed in the spare tyre stowed position for long time, it can cause vehicle shakiness, noise, or scratches.

Jump-Starting Instructions

WARNING

Never attempt to jump-start your vehicle if the battery appears to be frozen. Batteries in this condition may explode.
When making jump lead connections, be certain that your hands and the jump leads remain clear from pulleys, belts or fans.
Batteries produce flammable hydrogen gas. Keep flames and sparks away from the battery or an explosion may occur. Never smoke when working near the battery.
If the booster battery you use for jump-starting is installed in another vehicle, make sure the two vehicles are not touching each other.
If your battery discharges repeatedly, for no apparent reason, have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work-shop.
To avoid harm to yourself or dam-age to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump-starting instructions below.
If you are in doubt, call for qualified road service.

NOTICE
Your vehicle should not be started by pushing or towing. This starting method could result in permanent damage to the catalytic converter. Use jump leads to start a vehicle with a weak or flat battery.

Jump-Starting

Use only a 12-volt battery to jump-start your vehicle. Position the good 12-volt battery close to your vehicle so that the jump leads will reach both batteries. When using a battery installed on another vehicle, check that two vehicles do not touch each other. Set the parking brakes fully on both vehicles.
Turn off all vehicle accessories, except those necessary for safety reasons (for example, headlights or hazard lights).

Connect jump leads as follows:
Connect one end of the first jump lead to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (1).
Connect the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (2).
Connect one end of the second jump lead to the negative (–) terminal of the booster battery (2).
Make the final connection to an unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.
engine mount bolt (3)) of the engine of the vehicle with the dis-charged battery (1).

WARNING
Never connect the jump lead directly to the negative (–) terminal of the dis-charged battery, or an explosion may occur.

CAUTION
Connect the jump lead to the engine mount bolt securely. If the jump lead disconnects from the engine mount bolt because of vibration at the start of the engine, the jump lead could be caught in the drive belts.

If the booster battery you are using is fitted to another vehicle, start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery. Run the engine at moderate speed.
Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Remove the jump leads in the exact reverse order in which you connected them.

Towing Your Vehicle

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional service. SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop can provide you with detailed towing instructions.

NOTICE

Observe the following instructions when towing your vehicle.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle during towing, proper equipment and towing procedures must be used.
Using the frame hook, tow your vehicle on paved roads for short distances at low speed.

Wheel Drive (2WD) Automatic Transmission

Automatic transmission vehicles may be towed using either of the following methods.

From the front, with the front wheels lifted and the rear wheels on the ground. Before towing, make sure that the parking brake is released.
From the rear, with the rear wheels lifted and a dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE
Towing your vehicle with the front wheels on the ground can result in damage to the automatic transmission.

Wheel Drive (2WD) Manual Transmission

Manual transmission vehicles may be towed using either of the following methods.

From the front, with the front wheels lifted and the rear wheels on the ground. Before towing, make sure that the parking brake is released.
From the rear, with the rear wheels lifted and the front wheels on the ground, provided the steering and drivetrain are in operational condition. Before towing, make sure that the transmission is in neutral, the steering wheel is unlocked (vehicle without a keyless push start system – the ignition key should be in “ACC” position) (vehicle with a keyless push start system – the ignition mode is “ACC”), and the steering wheel is secured with a clamping device designed for towing service.

NOTICE
The steering column is not strong enough to withstand shocks transmitted from the front wheels during towing. Always unlock the steering wheel before towing.

Engine Trouble: Starter Does not Operate

Try turning the ignition switch to “START” position or try pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “START” with the headlights turned on to determine the battery condition. If the headlights go excessively dim or go off, it usually means that either the battery is discharged or the battery terminal contact is poor. Recharge the battery or correct battery terminal contact as necessary.
If the headlights remain bright, check the fuses. If the reason for failure of the starter is not obvious, there may be a major electrical problem. Have the vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Engine Trouble: Does not Start

Make sure that your vehicle has enough fuel and battery. If the engine does not start under very cold conditions, press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it while cranking the engine. Refer to “Starting engine (vehicle without keyless push start system) (if equipped)” or “Starting engine (vehicle with keyless push start system) (if equipped)” in the operating your vehicle section. If the engine still does not start have your vehicle inspected at a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. Do not operate the starter motor for more than 12 seconds.

(Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System)
NOTE:
If the engine refuses to start, the starter motor automatically stops after a certain period of time. After the starter motor has automatically stopped or if there is anything abnormal in the engine starting system, the starter motor runs only while the engine switch is held pressed.

Engine Trouble: Overheating

The engine could overheat temporarily under severe driving conditions. If the high engine coolant temperature warning light comes on as overheating during driving:

Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.
Take the vehicle to a safe place and park.
Run the engine at a normal idle speed for a few minutes until the high engine coolant temperature warning light goes off.

WARNING
If you see or hear escaping steam, stop the vehicle in a safe place and immediately turn off the engine to cool it. Do not open the hood when steam is present. When the steam can no longer be seen or heard, open the hood to see if the coolant is still boiling. If it is, you must wait until it stops boiling before you proceed.

If the high engine coolant temperature warning light does not go off:

Turn off the engine and check that the water pump belt and pulleys are not damaged or slipping. If any abnormality is found, correct it.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir. If it is found to be lower than the “LOW” line, check the radiator, water pump and radiator hoses for leakage. If leakage that may cause overheating is found, do not run the engine until these problems have been corrected.
If leakage is not found, carefully add coolant to the reservoir and then the radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine Coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.).

WARNING
It is hazardous to remove the radiator cap when the water temperature is high, because scalding fluid and steam may be blown out under pressure. The cap should only be taken off when the coolant temperature has lowered. To help prevent personal injury, keep hands, tools and clothing away from the engine cooling fan and air-conditioner fan (if equipped). These electric fans can automatically turn on without warning.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, Emergency Service, ERTIGA, ERTIGA EMERGENCY SERVICE, New ERTIGA, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

2018 Suzuki New ERTIGA INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

The 2018 Suzuki Ertiga is a flexible and family-friendly car that needs careful review and maintenance to make sure it keeps running well and stays safe for as long as possible. This small multi-purpose vehicle (MPV) is not only a reliable way to get around, but it is also loved by many families. A well-organized repair plan is needed to keep it in the best shape. Regular care, like changing the oil, rotating the tires, checking the brakes, and checking the whole system, not only makes the Ertiga last longer, but it also keeps it running well and safe. The 2018 Suzuki Ertiga rewards its owners with a good balance of utility and comfort, making it great for both daily commutes and road trips. This is made possible by regular inspections and upkeep. With this proactive approach, this MPV will continue to be a trusted vehicle for families and people alike, keeping its value and dependability on the road.

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Take extreme care when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury.

Carefully observe the following precautions:

To prevent damage or unintended activation of the airbag system or seat belt pre-tensioner system, be sure that the battery is disconnected and the ignition switch has been in LOCK position or the ignition mode has been “LOCK” (OFF) for at least 90 seconds before performing any electrical service work on
your SUZUKI vehicle. Do not touch airbag system components, seat belt pre-tensioner system components or wires.
The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow for easy identification.
Do not leave the engine running in garages or other confined areas.
When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, tools, and other objects away from the fan and drive belt. Even though the fan may not be moving, it can automatically turn on without warning.
When it is necessary to perform service work with the engine running, make sure that the parking brake is set fully and the transmission is in Neutral (for manual transmission vehicles) or Park (for automatic transmission vehicles).
Do not touch ignition wires or other ignition system parts when starting the engine or when the engine is running, or you could receive an electric shock.
Be careful not to touch a hot engine, exhaust manifold and pipes, muffler, radiator and water hoses.
Do not allow smoking, sparks, or flames around fuel or the battery. Flammable fumes are present.
Do not get under your vehicle if it is supported only with the portable jack provided in your vehicle.
Be careful not to cause accidental short circuits between the positive and negative battery terminals.
Keep used oil, coolant, and other fluids away from children and pets. Dispose of used fluids properly; never pour them on the ground, into sewers, etc.

Maintenance Schedule

The following table shows the times when you should perform regular maintenance on your vehicle. This table shows in miles, kilometers and months when you should perform inspections, adjustments, lubrication and other services. These intervals should be shortened if driving is usually done under severe conditions (refer to “Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions”).

WARNING
SUZUKI recommends that maintenance on items marked with an asterisk (*) be performed by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. If you are qualified, you may perform maintenance on the unmarked items by referring to the instructions in this section. If you are not sure whether you can successfully complete any of the unmarked maintenance jobs, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to do the maintenance for you.

NOTICE
Whenever it becomes necessary to replace parts on your vehicle, it is recommended that you use genuine SUZUKI replacement parts or their equivalent.

Periodic Maintenance Schedule

“R”: Replace or Change
“I”: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 180000 km (108000 miles). Beyond 180000 km (108000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	15	30	45	60	75	90
	miles (x1000)	9	18	27	36	45	54
	months	12	24	36	48	60	72
ENGINE
1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, Adjustment, *Replacement		I	I	I	I	I	I
		–	–	–	–	R	–
*1-2. Valve clearance		–	I	–	I	–	I
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter		R	R	R	R	R	R
1-4. Engine coolant		–	–	R	–	–	R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst)		–	I	–	I	–	I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs
When unleaded fuel is used Nickel plug		–	–	R	–	–	R
When leaded fuel is used, refer to “Severe Driving Condition” schedule.
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road		I	I	R	I	I	R
Dusty condition		Refer to “Severe Driving condition” schedule.
*3-2. Fuel lines		–	I	–	I	–	I
*3-3. Fuel filter		Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank		–	–	I	–	–	I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve		–	–	–	–	–	I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system		–	–	–	–	–	I

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	105	120	135	150	165	180
	miles (x1000)	63	72	81	90	99	108
	months	84	96	108	120	132	144
ENGINE
1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, Adjustment, *Replacement		I	I	I	I	I	I
		–	–	–	R	–	–
*1-2. Valve clearance		–	I	–	I	–	I
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter		R	R	R	R	R	R
1-4. Engine coolant		–	–	R	–	–	R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst)		–	I	–	I	–	I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs
When unleaded fuel is used Nickel plug		–	–	R	–	–	R
When leaded fuel is used, refer to “Severe Driving Condition” schedule.
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road		I	I	R	I	I	R
Dusty condition		Refer to “Severe Driving condition” schedule.
*3-2. Fuel lines		–	I	–	I	–	I
*3-3. Fuel filter		Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank		–	–	I	–	–	I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve		–	–	–	–	–	I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system		–	–	–	–	–	I

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	15	30	45	60	75	90
	miles (x1000)	9	18	27	36	45	54
	months	12	24	36	48	60	72
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front)		I	I	I	I	I	I
Brake drums and shoes (rear)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes		–	I	–	I	–	I
5-3. Brake pedal		I	I	I	I	I	I
*5-4. Brake fluid (#1)		I	R	I	R	I	R
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only)		I	–	–	–	–	–
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch pedal		I	I	I	I	I	I
*6-2. Clutch fluid (#1)		I	R	I	R	I	R
6-3. Tyres/Wheels (#2)		I	I	I	I	I	I
*6-4. Drive axle boots (#3)		–	–	I	–	–	I
*6-5. Suspension system (#4)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-6. Steering system (#5)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-7. Manual transmission oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		Inspect every 30000 km (18000miles) or 24 months.
		Replace every 150000 km (90000miles) or 120 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		I	–	R	–	–	R
(I: 1st 15000 km only)
6-8. Automatic transmission Fluid level		–	I	–	I	–	I
* Fluid change		Replace every 165000 km (99000 miles)
* Fluid hose		–	–	–	I	–	–
6-9. All latches, hinges and locks		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-10. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)		–	I	R	–	I	R

Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir.
Tyres/Wheels (including tyre rotation) for Mexico models : Inspect every 15000 km (9000 miles) or 12 months.
Drive axle boots for Mexico models
Suspension system for Mexico models
Steering system for Mexico models

WARNING
The shock absorbers are filled with high pressure gas. Never attempt to disassemble them or throw them into a fire. Avoid storing them near a heater or heating device. When scrapping the absorber, the gas must be released from the absorber safely. Ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	105	120	135	150	165	180
	miles (x1000)	63	72	81	90	99	108
	months	84	96	108	120	132	144
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front)		I	I	I	I	I	I
Brake drums and shoes (rear)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes		–	I	–	I	–	I
5-3. Brake pedal		I	I	I	I	I	I
*5-4. Brake fluid (#1)		I	R	I	R	I	R
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only)		–	–	–	–	–	–
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch pedal		I	I	I	I	I	I
*6-2. Clutch fluid (#1)		I	R	I	R	I	R
6-3. Tyres/Wheels (#2)		I	I	I	I	I	I
*6-4. Drive axle boots (#3)		–	–	I	–	–	I
*6-5. Suspension system (#4)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-6. Steering system (#5)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-7. Manual transmission oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		Inspect every 30000 km (18000miles) or 24 months.
		Replace every 150000 km (90000miles) or 120 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		–	–	R	–	–	R
(I: 1st 15000 km only)
6-8. Automatic transmission Fluid level		–	I	–	I	–	I
* Fluid change		Replace every 165000 km (99000 miles)
* Fluid hose		–	I	–	–	–	I
6-9. All latches, hinges and locks		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-10. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)		–	I	R	–	I	R

Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir.
Tyres/Wheels (including tyre rotation) for Mexico models : Inspect every 15000 km (9000 miles) or 12 months.
Drive axle boots for Mexico models
Suspension system for Mexico models
Steering system for Mexico models

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions

Follow this schedule if your vehicle is mainly operated under one or more of the following conditions:

When most trips are less than 6 km (4 miles).
When most trips are less than 16 km (10 miles) and outside temperature remains below freezing.
Idling and/or low-speed operation in stop-and-go traffic.
Operating in extremely cold weather and/or on salted roads.
Operating in rough and/or muddy areas.
Operating in dusty areas.
Repeated high speed drive or high engine revolutions.
Towing a trailer, if admitted.
Schedule should also be followed if the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications.

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	7.5	15	22.5	30	37.5	45
	miles (x1000)	4.5	9	13.5	18	22.5	27
	months	6	12	18	24	30	36
ENGINE
1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, Adjustment, *Replacement		I	I	I	I	I	I
		–	–	–	–	R	–
*1-2. Valve Clearance		–	–	–	I	–	–
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter		R	R	R	R	R	R
1-4. Engine coolant		–	–	–	–	–	R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst)		–	–	–	I	–	–
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs Nickel plug		Replace every 10000 km (6000 miles) or 8 months.
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element*¹		Inspect every 2500 km (1500 miles).
		Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*3-2. Fuel lines		–	–	–	I	–	–
*3-3. Fuel filter		Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank		–	–	–	–	–	I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve		–	–	–	–	–	–
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system		–	–	–	–	–	–

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	52.5	60	67.5	75	82.5	90
	miles (x1000)	31.5	36	40.5	45	49.5	54
	months	42	48	54	60	66	72
ENGINE
1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, Adjustment, *Replacement		I	I	I	I	I	I
		–	–	–	R	–	–
*1-2. Valve Clearance		–	I	–	–	–	I
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter		R	R	R	R	R	R
1-4. Engine coolant		–	–	–	–	–	R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst)		–	I	–	–	–	I
IGNITION
2-1. Spark plugs Nickel plug		Replace every 10000 km (6000 miles) or 8 months..
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element*¹		Inspect every 2500 km (1500 miles).
		Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*3-2. Fuel lines		–	I	–	–	–	I
*3-3. Fuel filter		Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank		–	–	–	–	–	I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve		–	–	–	–	–	I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system		–	–	–	–	–	I

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	7.5	15	22.5	30	37.5	45
	miles (x1000)	4.5	9	13.5	18	22.5	27
	months	6	12	18	24	30	36
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front)		–	I	–	I	–	I
Brake drums and shoes (rear)		–	–	–	I	–	–
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes		–	–	–	I	–	–
5-3. Brake pedal		–	I	–	I	–	I
*5-4. Brake fluid (#1)		–	I	–	R	–	I
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only)		–	I	–	–	–	–
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch pedal		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-2. Clutch fluid (#1)		–	I	–	R	–	I
6-3. Tyres/Wheels (#2)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-4. Wheel bearings (#3)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-5. Drive axle boots (#4)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-6. Suspension system (#5)		–	–	–	I	–	–
*6-7. Steering system (#6)		–	–	–	I	–	–
*6-8. Manual transmission oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		Inspect every 30000 km (18000miles) or 24 months.
		Replace every 60000 km (36000miles) or 48 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		–	–	–	R	–	–
6-9. Automatic transmission Fluid level		–	–	–	I	–	–
*Fluid change		–	–	–	R	–	–
*Fluid hose		Inspect every 60000 km (36000miles) or 48 months.
6-10. All latches, hinges and locks		–	–	–	I	–	–
6-11. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)²		–	I	–	I	–	R

WARNING
The shock absorbers are filled with high-pressure gas. Never attempt to disassemble them or throw them into a fire. Avoid storing them near a heater or heating device. When scrapping the absorber, the gas must be released from the absorber safely. Ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer reading or months, whichever comes first.	km (x1000)	52.5	60	67.5	75	82.5	90
	miles (x1000)	31.5	36	40.5	45	49.5	54
	months	42	48	54	60	66	72
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front)		–	I	–	I	–	I
Brake drums and shoes (rear)		–	I	–	–	–	I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes		–	I	–	–	–	I
5-3. Brake pedal		–	I	–	I	–	I
*5-4. Brake fluid (#1)		–	R	–	I	–	R
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only)		–	–	–	–	–	–
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch pedal		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-2. Clutch fluid (#1)		–	R	–	I	–	R
6-3. Tyres/Wheels (#2)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-4. Wheel bearings (#3)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-5. Drive axle boots (#4)		–	I	–	I	–	I
*6-6. Suspension system (#5)		–	I	–	–	–	I
*6-7. Steering system (#6)		–	I	–	–	–	I
*6-8. Manual transmission oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		Inspect every 30000 km (18000miles) or 24 months
		Replace every 60000 km (36000miles) or 48 months
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80”		–	R	–	–	–	R
6-9. Automatic transmission Fluid level		–	I	–	–	–	I
*Fluid change		–	R	–	–	–	R
*Fluid hose		Inspect every 60000 km (36000miles) or 48 months.
6-10. All latches, hinges, and locks		–	I	–	–	–	I
6-11. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)²		–	I	–	I	–	R

Clutch fluid is supplied from the brake fluid reservoir.
Tires/Wheels (including tire rotation) for Mexico models: Inspect every 7500 km (4500 miles) or 6 months.
Wheel bearings for Mexico models
Drive axle boots for Mexico models
Suspension system for Mexico models
The steering system for Mexico models.

NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 90000 km (54000 miles). Beyond 90000 km (54000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.* 1 Inspect more frequently if the vehicle is used under dusty conditions. Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases.

Drive Belt

WARNING
When the engine is running, keep hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away from the moving fan and drive belts.

Check that the drive belt tension is correct while the engine is stopped. If the belt is too loose, insufficient battery charging, engine overheating, poor air conditioning, or excessive belt wear can result. When you push the belt with your thumb midpoint between the pulleys, there should be a deflection according to the following chart. The belts should also be examined to ensure that they are not damaged. If you need to replace or adjust the belt have it done by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Vehicle front
Vehicle rear
Generator
Water pump
Tensioner pulley
Air conditioner compressor

Drive belt deflection
(100 N (10 kg, 22 lbs) press)

(a) New:
4.8 – 5.9 mm (0.19 – 0.23 in.) Readjustment:
7.2 – 8.2 mm (0.28 – 0.32 in.)

(b) New:
3.2 – 3.9 mm (0.12 – 0.15 in.) Readjustment:
4.8 – 5.6 mm (0.19 – 0.22 in.)

Engine Oil and Filter

Specified Oil

Preferred
Check that the engine oil you use comes under the quality classification of SG, SH, SJ, SL, SM or SN. Select the appropriate oil viscosity according to the above chart.
SAE 0W-20 (1) is the best choice for good fuel economy and good startability in cold weather.

NOTE:
We recommend that you use SUZUKI genuine oil. To purchase it, visit a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Oil Level Check

It is important to keep the engine oil at the correct level for proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle is on a slope. The oil level should be checked either before starting the engine or at least 5 minutes after stopping the engine. The handle of the engine oil dipstick is colored with yellow for easy identification. Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe the oil off with a clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way into the engine, and then remove it again. The oil on the stick should be between the upper and lower limits shown on the stick. If the oil level indication is near the lower limit, add enough oil to raise the level to the upper limit.

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.

Refilling

Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly through the filler hole to bring the oil level to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful not to overfill the oil. Too much oil is almost as bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the engine and allow it to idle for about a minute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes and check the oil level again.

Changing Engine Oil and Filter
Drain the engine oil while the engine is still warm.

Remove the oil filler cap.
Place a drain pan under the drain plug.
Using a wrench, remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil.

CAUTION
The engine oil temperature may be high enough to burn your fingers when the drain plug is loosened. Wait until the drain plug is cool enough to touch with your bare hands.

Tightening torque for drain plug 35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb ft)

WARNING
Engine oil can be hazardous. Children and pets may be harmed by swallowing new or used oil. Keep new and used oil and used oil filters away from children and pets. Repeated, prolonged contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Brief contact with used oil may irritate skin. To minimize your exposure to used oil, wear a long-sleeve shirt and moisture-proof gloves (such as dish-washing gloves) when changing oil. If oil contacts your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Launder any clothing or rags if it is with oil.
Recycle or properly dispose of used oil and filters. Reinstall the drain plug with new gasket. Tighten the plug with a wrench to the specified torque.

Oil Filter Replacement

Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil filter counterclockwise and remove it.
Using a clean rag, wipe off the mounting surface on the engine where the new filter will be seated.
Smear a small amount of engine oil around the rubber gasket of the new oil filter.
Screw the new filter by hand until the filter gasket contacts the mounting sur-face.

Loosen
Tighten

Tightening (viewed from filter top)

Oil filter
3/4 turn

NOTICE
To tighten the oil filter properly, it is important to accurately identify the position at which the filter gasket first contacts the mounting surface. Tighten the filter as specified below from the point of contact with the mounting surface (or to the specified torque) using an oil filter wrench.

Tightening torque for oil filter 3/4 turn or 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft)

NOTICE
To prevent oil leakage, make sure that the oil filter is tight, but do not over-tighten it.

Refill with Oil and Oil Leakage Check

Pour oil through the filler hole and install the filler cap. For the approximate capacity of the oil, refer to “Capacities” in “SPECIFICA-TIONS” section.
Start the engine and carefully check the oil filter and the drain plug for leakage. Run the engine at various speeds for at least 5 minutes.
Stop the engine and wait about 5 minutes. Check the oil level again and add oil if necessary. Check for leakage again.

NOTICE

When replacing the oil filter, it is recommended that you use a genuine SUZUKI replacement filter. If you use an aftermarket filter, make sure it is of equivalent quality and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Oil leakage from the periphery of the oil filter or drain plug indicate incorrect installation or gasket damage. If you find any leakage or are not sure that the filter has been properly tightened, have the vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Engine Coolant

Selection of Coolant

To maintain optimum performance and durability of your engine, use SUZUKI genuine coolant or equivalent. This type of coolant is the best for cooling system for the following reasons:

The coolant helps maintain proper engine temperature.
It gives proper protection against freezing and boiling.
It gives proper protection against corrosion and rust.

Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-age your cooling system. SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop can help you select the proper coolant.

NOTICE
To avoid damaging your cooling system:

Always use a high quality ethylene glycol base non-silicate type cool-ant diluted with distilled water at the correct mixture concentration.
Check that the proper mix is 50/50 coolant to distilled water and in no case higher than 70/30. Concentrations greater than 70/30 coolant to distilled water will cause overheating conditions.
Do not use straight coolant nor plain water.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives. They may not be compatible with your cooling system.
Do not mix different types of base coolants. Doing so may result in accelerated seal wear and/or the possibility of severe overheating and extensive engine or automatic transmission damage.

Coolant Level Check
Check the coolant level at the reservoir tank, not at the radiator. With the engine cool, the coolant level should be between “FULL” and “LOW” marks.

Adding Coolant

WARNING

Swallowing engine coolant can cause severe injury or death. Inhaling cool-ant mist or vapors or getting coolant in your eyes could result in severe injury.
Do not drink antifreeze or coolant solution. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Immediately con-tact a poison control center or a physician.
Avoid inhaling coolant mist or hot vapors. If inhaled, remove to a fresh air area.
If coolant gets in the eyes, flush with water and seek medical attention.
Wash thoroughly after handling coolant.
Keep engine coolant out of the reach of children and pets.

NOTICE

The mixture you use should contain 50% concentration of anti-freeze.
If the lowest ambient temperature in your area is expected to be –35°C (–31°F) or below, use higher concentrations up to 60% following the instructions on the antifreeze container.
If the coolant level is below “LOW” mark, coolant should be added. While the engine is cool, remove the reservoir tank cap and add coolant until the reservoir tank level reaches “FULL” mark. Never fill the reservoir tank above “FULL” mark.
NOTICE
When putting the cap on the reservoir tank, line up the mark on the cap and the mark on the tank. Failure to follow this can result in coolant leak-age.

Coolant Replacement
Since special procedures are required, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for this job.
Air Cleaner
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there will be greater intake resistance, resulting in decreased power output and increased fuel consumption. Unclamp the side clamps and remove the element from the air cleaner case. If it appears to be dirty, replace it with a new one. Clamp the side clamps securely.

Spark Plugs

For nickel spark plugs (traditional type): You should inspect spark plugs periodically for carbon deposits. When carbon accumulates on a spark plug, a strong spark may not be produced. Remove car-bon deposits with a wire or pin and adjust the spark plug gap.

To access the spark plug:

If necessary, disconnect the coupler (1) while pushing the release lever.
Remove the ignitor bolts.
Pull the spark plug boots out.

NOTE:
During installation, make sure that the wires, couplers, sealing rubber of air cleaners’ and washers, are correctly returned in place.

NOTICE

When pulling out the ignition coils, do not pull on the cable. Pulling on the cable can damage it.
When servicing the iridium/platinum spark plugs (slender center electrode type plugs), do not touch the center electrode, as it is easy to damage.

NOTICE

When installing the spark plugs, screw them in with your fingers to avoid stripping the threads. Tighten the spark plugs with a torque wrench to 17.5 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13.0 lb-ft). Do not allow contaminants to enter the engine through the spark plug holes when the plugs are removed.
Never use spark plugs with the wrong thread size.

NOTICE
When replacing spark plugs, you should use the brand and type specified for your vehicle. For the specified plugs, refer to “SPECIFICATIONS” section in the end of this book. If you wish to use a brand of spark plug other than the specified plugs, consult a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Gear Oil

Specified Gear Oil

When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the appropriate viscosity and grade as shown in the chart below.
We highly recommend you use:
“SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W-80” for manual transmission gear oil.

Manual Transmission oil

Gear Oil Level Check

Manual Transmission

Oil filler and level plug
To check the gear oil level, use the following procedure:1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with the parking brake applied. Then, stop the engine.
Remove the oil filler and level plug (1).
If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If gear oil does not flow from the plug hole, add oil through the filler plug hole until oil flows a little from the plug hole.
If the oil level is low, add gear oil through the oil filler and level plug hole (1) until the oil level reaches the bottom of the filler hole, then reinstall the plug.

Tightening torque for oil filler and level plug (1)
Manual Transmission:
21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)

CAUTION
After driving the vehicle, the gear oil temperature may be high enough to burn you. Wait until the oil filler and level plug is cool enough to touch with your bare hands before inspecting gear oil level.

NOTICE
When tightening the plug, apply the following sealing compound or equivalent to the plug threads to pre-vent oil leakage.
SUZUKI Bond No. “1216E” or “1217G”.

Gear Oil Change

Since special procedures, materials and tools are required, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for this job.

Clutch

Clutch Pedal

Clutch pedal play “d”: MAX. 10 mm (0.39 in.)

Measure the clutch pedal play by moving the clutch pedal with your hand and measuring the distance it moves until you feel slight resistance. The play in the clutch pedal should be between the specified values. If the play is more or less than the above, or clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully depressed, have the clutch inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Clutch Fluid

Check the clutch pedal for smooth operation and clutch fluid level from time to time. If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully depressed, have the clutch inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. If the clutch fluid level is near “MIN” line, fill it up to “MAX” line with DOT3 brake fluid.

NOTICE
Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir. If your clutch fluid level is increased or near the “MIN” line, there is a possibility of clutch or brake fluid leakage or abnormal wear of clutch. Have your vehicle inspected immediately by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Automatic Transmission (AT) Fluid

Specified Fluid
Use an automatic transmission fluid SUZUKI AT OIL AW-1.

Fluid Level Check

NOTICE
Driving with too much or too little fluid can damage the transmission.

You must check the fluid level with the automatic transmission fluid at normal operating temperature.

To check the fluid level:
To warm up the transmission fluid, drive the vehicle or idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature light (blue color) goes off.
Then drive for ten more minutes.

NOTICE
Be sure to use the specified automatic transmission fluid. Using automatic transmission fluid other than SUZUKI AT OIL AW-1 may damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

NOTE:
Do not check the fluid level if you have just driven the vehicle for a long time at high speed, if you have driven in city traffic in hot weather. Wait until the fluid cools down (about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indication will not be correct.

Park your vehicle on level ground.
Apply the parking brake and then start the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle for two minutes and keep it running during the fluid level check.
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever through each gear position, pausing for about three seconds in each position. Then move it back to “P” (Park) position.

WARNING
Be sure to depress the brake pedal when moving the gearshift lever, or the vehicle can move suddenly.

The handle of the A/T fluid dipstick is colored red for easy identification. Remove the dipstick, wipe the oil off with a clean cloth and push it back in until the cap seats. Then pull out the dipstick.
Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lowest level. The fluid level should be between the two marks in hot range on the dipstick.
FULL HOT
LOW HOT
The lowest point = Fluid level
Add just enough specified fluid through the dipstick hole to fill the transmission oil to the proper level.
NOTICE

After checking or adding oil, be sure to insert the dipstick securely.

Changing Oil

Since special procedures, materials, and tools are required to change the automatic transmission oil, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for this job.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Check the brake fluid level by looking at the reservoir in the engine compartment. Check that the fluid level is between “MAX” and “MIN” lines.

WARNING
Failure to follow the guidelines below can result in personal injury or serious trouble in the brake system.
If the brake fluid in the reservoir drops below a certain level, the brake warning light on the instrument panel will come on (the engine must be running with the parking brake fully disengaged). Should the light come on, immediately ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to inspect the brake system.
A rapid fluid loss indicates a leakage in the brake system. In this case, immediately ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to inspect the brake system.
Do not use any fluid other than SAE J1703 or DOT3 brake fluid. Do not use reclaimed fluid or fluid that has been stored in old or open containers. It is essential that foreign particles and other liquids are kept out of the brake fluid reservoir.
Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swallowed, and harmful if it comes in contact with skin or eyes. If swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Immediately contact a poison control center or a physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes, flush eyes with water and seek medical attention. Wash thoroughly after handling. Solution can be poisonous to animals. Keep out of reach of children and animals.

NOTICE
If your brake fluid level is near “MIN” line, there is a possibility of brake pad and/or shoe wear and brake fluid leakage. In this case, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to inspect the brake system.
Brake fluid can damage painted surfaces. Use caution when refilling the reservoir.

NOTE:
The fluid level can be expected to gradually fall as the brake pad and/or shoe wear.
Brake fluid absorbs water over time and brake fluid with high water content may cause vapor lock or brake system malfunction.
Replace the brake fluid according to the maintenance schedule in this owner’s manual.

Brake Pedal

Check if the brake pedal stops at the regular height without “spongy” feeling when you depress it. If not, have the brake system inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. If you doubt the brake pedal for the regular height, check it as follows:

Pedal to floor carpet minimum distance “a”:

LHD	MT	61 mm (2.4 in.)
LHD	AT	57 mm (2.2 in.)
RHD	47 mm (1.8 in.)

With the engine running, measure the distance between the brake pedal and floor carpet when the pedal is depressed with approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The minimum distance required is as specified. Since your vehicle’s brake system is self-adjusting, there is no need for pedal adjustment.
If the pedal to floor carpet distance as measured above is less than the minimum distance required, have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

NOTE:
When measuring the distance between the brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to include the floor mat or rubber on the floor wall in your measurement.

WARNING
If the brake pad lining becomes worn and it has reached its minimum thick-ness, squealing noise sounds during braking. If you hear this noise, have the vehicle inspected immediately by an authorized SUZUKI dealer. Continued driving with this condition can cause an accident.

CAUTION
If you experience any of the following problems with your vehicle’s brake system, have the vehicle inspected immediately by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Poor braking performance
Uneven braking (brakes not working uniformly on all wheels)
Excessive pedal travel
Brake dragging

Parking Brake

Ratchet tooth specification “b”: 4th – 9th
Lever pull force (1):
200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs)

Check the parking brake for proper adjustment by counting the number of clicks made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly pull up on the parking brake lever to the point of full engagement. The parking brake lever should stop between the specified ratchet teeth and the rear wheels should be securely locked. If the parking brake is not properly adjusted or the brakes drag is suspected even after the lever has been fully released, have the parking brake inspected and/or adjusted by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Brake Discs and Brake Drums
Brake disc

Brake location	Minimum thickness
Front wheels	20.0 mm (0.8 in.)

Brake drum

Brake location	Maximum inner diameter
Rear wheels	222 mm (8.7 in.)

If the measured thickness or inner diameter of the most worn part falls below or exceeds the value indicated above, the parts should be replaced with a new one. The measurement involves disassembling each brake and requires the use of a micrometer or caliper, which must be done according to the instructions described in the relevant service manual or available from the relevant repair information site.

Steering Wheel

Steering wheel play “c”: 0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)
Check the play of the steering wheel by gently turning it from left to right and measuring the distance that it moves before you feel slight resistance. The play should be between the specified values. Check that the steering wheel turns easily and smoothly without rattling by turning it all the way to the right and to the left while driving very slowly in an open area. If the amount of free play is outside the specification or you find anything else to be wrong, an inspection must be performed by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work-shop.

Tires

The front and rear tyre pressure specifications for your vehicle are listed in the tyre information label. Both front and rear tyres should have the specified tyre pressure.

Tyre Inspection

Inspect your vehicle’s tyres at least once a month or before long trip by performing the following checks:

Measure the air pressure with a tyre gauge. Adjust the pressure if necessary. Remember to check the spare tyre, too.

WARNING

Air pressures should be checked when the tyres are cold or you may get inaccurate readings.
Check the inflation pressure from time to time while inflating the tyre gradually, until the specified pressure is obtained.
Never underinflate or over-inflate the tyres.
Underinflation can cause unusual handling characteristics or can cause the rim to slip on the tyre bead, resulting in an accident or damage to the tyre or rim.
Overinflation can cause the tyre to burst, resulting in personal injury. Overinflation can also cause unusual handling characteristics which may result in an accident.
Tread wear indicator
Indicator location mark
Check that the depth of the tread groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). To help you check this, the tyres have molded-in tread wear indicators in the grooves. When the indicators appear on the tread surface, the remaining depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less and the tyre should be replaced.
Check for abnormal wear, cracks and damage. Any tyres with cracks or other damage should be replaced. If any tyres show abnormal wear, have them inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.
CAUTION
Hitting curbs and running over rocks can damage tyres and affect wheel alignment. Have tyres and wheel alignment checked periodically by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work-shop.
Check for loose wheel nuts.
Check that there are no nails, stones or other objects sticking into the tyres.

WARNING
Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with tyres which are all the same type and size. This is important to ensure proper steering and handling of the vehicle. Never mix tyres of different size or type on the four wheels of your vehicle.

The size and type of tyres used should be only those approved by SUZUKI as standard or optional equipment for your vehicle.
Replacing the wheels and tyres equipped on your vehicle with certain combinations of aftermarket wheels and tyres can significantly change the steering and handling characteristics of your vehicle. Therefore, use only those wheel and tyre combinations approved by SUZUKI as standard or optional equipment for your vehicle.

NOTICE
Replacing the original tyres with tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer or odometer readings. Check with a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop before purchasing replacement tyres that differ in size from the original tyres.

Tyre Rotation

4-tyre rotation

To avoid uneven wear of your tyres and to prolong their life, rotate the tyres as illus-trated. Tyres should be rotated every 10000 km (6000 miles). After rotation, adjust front and rear tyre pressures to the specification listed in your vehicle’s Tyre Information Label.

NOTE:
For Mexico:
For additional instruction, refer to the “SUPPLEMENT” section at the end of this book.

Battery

WARNING
Batteries produce flammable hydrogen gas. Keep flames and sparks away from the battery or an explosion may occur. Never smoke when working in the vicinity of the battery. When checking or servicing the battery, disconnect the negative cable. Be careful not to cause a short circuit by allowing metal objects to contact the battery posts and the vehicle at the same time. To avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump-starting instructions in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” section of this manual if it is necessary to jump-start your vehicle. Diluted sulfuric acid spilled from battery can cause blindness or severe burns. Use proper eye protection and gloves. Flush eyes or body with ample water and get medical care immediately if suffered. Keep batteries out of reach of children.

For a maintenance-free battery (cap-less type), you need not add water. For traditional type battery, which has water filler caps, the level of the battery fluid must be kept between the “UPPER” and the “LOWER” level lines at all times. If the level is found to be below the “LOWER” level line, add distilled water to the “UPPER” level line. You should periodically check the battery, battery terminals, and battery hold-down bracket for corrosion. Remove corrosion using a stiff brush and ammonia mixed with water, or baking soda mixed with water. After removing corrosion, rinse with clean water. If your vehicle is not going to be driven for a month or longer, disconnect the cable from the negative terminal of the battery to help prevent discharge.

Fuses

Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as described below:

Main fuse
The main fuse takes current directly from the battery.

Primary fuses
These fuses are between the main fuse and individual fuses, and are for electrical load groups.

Individual fuses
These fuses are for individual electrical circuits. To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller (1) provided in the relay box cover.

Relay box cover

Fuses in Engine Compartment

Main fuse box
Relay box

Main fuse box

MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE

MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE
(1)	120 A	FL1
(2)	100 A	FL2
(3)	80 A	FL3
(4)	100 A	FL4
(5)	50 A	FL5
(6)	30 A	Starting motor
(7)	30 A	Blower fan
(8)	–	Blank
(9)	40 A	ABS motor
(10)	40 A	Ignition switch
(11)	30 A	Back up
(12)	–	Blank
(13)	20 A	Front fog light
(14)	–	Blank
(15)	25 A	ABS SOL
(16)	–	Blank
(17)	10 A	Compressor
(18)	30 A	Blank
(19)	30 A	Radiator fan
(20)	–	Blank
(21)	–	Blank

(22)	25 A	Headlight HI
(23)	15 A	Headlight (Left)
(24)	15 A	Headlight (Right)
(25)	20 A	Blank
(26)	50 A	Ignition switch -2
(27)	15 A	Transmission
(28)	15 A	FI
(29)	–	Blank
(30)	15 A	Headlight HI (Left)
(31)	15 A	Headlight HI (Right)
(32)	5 A	Starting Signal
(33)	–	Blank

The main fuse, primary fuses and some of the individual fuses are located in the engine compartment. If the main fuse blows, no electrical component will function. If a primary fuse blows, no electrical component in the corresponding load group will function. When replacing the main fuse, a primary fuse or an individual fuse, use genuine SUZUKI replacement parts or equivalent for individual fuses. To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller provided in the fuse box. The amperage of each fuse is shown in the back of the fuse box cover.

WARNING
If the main fuse or a primary fuse blows, have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. Always use a genuine SUZUKI replacement. Never use a substitute such as a wire even for a temporary repair, or extensive electrical damage and a fire can result.

NOTE:
Make sure that the fuse box always carries spare fuses.

Fuses under Dashboard

PRIMARY FUSE
(1)	30 A	Power window
(2)	10 A	Meter
(3)	15 A	Ignition coil
(4)	5 A	Ignition-1 signal 2
(5)	20 A	Shift lever
(6)	20 A	S/R
(7)	–	Blank
(8)	20 A	DOOR LOCK
(9)	15 A	Steering lock
(10)	10 A	Hazard
(11)	5 A	A-STOP
(12)	10 A	RR FOG
(13)	5 A	ABS control module
(14)	15 A	REAR A/C
(15)	5 A	Ignition-1 signal 3
(16)	10 A	Dome light-2
(17)	5 A	Dome light
(18)	15 A	Radio
(19)	5 A	CONT
(20)	5 A	KEY2
(21)	20 A	Power window timer

(22)	5 A	KEY
(23)	15 A	Horn
(24)	5 A	Tail light (Left)
(25)	10 A	Tail light
(26)	10 A	Airbag
(27)	10 A	Ignition-1 signal
(28)	10 A	Back up light
(29)	5 A	ACC3
(30)	20 A	Rear defogger
(31)	10 A	MRR HTR
(32)	15 A	ACC2
(33)	5 A	ACC
(34)	10 A	Wiper
(35)	5 A	Ignition-2 signal
(36)	15 A	Washer
(37)	25 A	Front wiper
(38)	10 A	Stoplight

WARNING
Always replace a blown fuse with a fuse of the correct amperage. Never use a substitute such as aluminum foil or wire to replace a blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and the new one blows in a short period of time, you may have a major electrical problem. Have your vehicle inspected immediately by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

NOTE:
According to the vehicle specifications, fuse setting may be different from the specifications which are shown in the above tables.

Headlight Aiming

Since special procedures are required, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for this job.

Bulb Replacement

CAUTION
Light bulbs can be hot enough to burn your finger right after turning off lights. This is true especially for halogen headlight bulbs. Replace the bulbs after they become cool enough.
The headlight bulbs are filled with pressurized halogen gas. They can burst and injure you if they are hit or dropped. Handle them carefully.
To avoid injury by sharp-edged parts of the body, wear gloves and a long-sleeved shirt when replacing light bulbs.

NOTICE
The oils from your skin may cause a halogen bulb to overheat and burst when the lights are on. Grasp a new bulb with a clean cloth.

NOTICE
Frequent bulb replacement indicates the need for an inspection of the electrical system. This should be carried out by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

NOTE:
The inner surface of lens such as the headlights or the rear combination lights may be clouded or dew condensation may occur by driving on a rainy day or washing the vehicle. This is a temporary phenomenon caused by the temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lights. (This is the same phenomenon as the windows are clouded on a rainy day.) Also, it sometimes seems that water gets into the lights because of waterdrops on the edge of the lens. This is a temporary phenomenon caused by water adherence to the outside of the lights. The above-mentioned phenomena are not vehicle malfunctions. However, if water is piled up in the lights or large waterdrop adheres to the inner surface of lens, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Non-disassembled Type Lights

Since the lights shown below are non-dis-assemble type, you cannot replace a bulb. Replace the target assembly if any bulb is defective.
If you need to replace the assembly, ask your SUZUKI dealer.
Side turn signal light/hazard warning light on fender or outside rearview mirrors
High mount stop light
Tail/stop light

Headlight

Low beam

Open the engine food while the engine is stopped. Disconnect the coupler with pushing the lock release. Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise and remove it.

High beam

Open the engine food while the engine is stopped.
Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise and remove it.
Turn the bulb (2) holder counterclockwise and remove it. Disconnect the coupler with pushing the lock release.

Front Turn Signal Light Front Position Light

Front turn signal light
Front position light

Open the engine hood while the engine is stopped. To remove the bulb holder of the front turn signal light or the front position light from the light housing, turn the holder counterclockwise and pull it out.
- Removal
- Installation
To remove and install the bulb of the front turn signal light (1) or the front position light (2), simply pull out or push in the bulb.

Side Turn Signal Light

Outside rearview mirror type
LED is used. It is recommended that you take your vehicle to a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for bulb replacement since special procedures are required.

Fender typeSince the bulb is built-in type, replace it as the light assembly. Remove the light assembly by sliding the light housing left-ward with your finger.

Front Fog Light (if equipped)

Start the engine. Turn the steering wheel to the opposite side of the fog light to be replaced to replace the bulb easily. Then turn off the engine.
Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the hole (2) and remove the clips (1) by twist the driver as shown in the illustration.
Open the fender cover. Disconnect the coupler with pushing the lock release. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

Rear Combination Light (Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, etc.)
For LED tail / stop light, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for bulb replacement since special procedures are required.

With the tailgate opened, remove the bolts (1) and pull the tail light (2) firmly to the rearward.

NOTICE
Do not pull the tail light (2) by force. In the case of the type which tail light turns on, it may cause an electric wiring (5) (if equipped) cutoff.

NOTE:
When it is difficult to remove the rear combination light from the body at a low temperature (10 deg. C or less), pour water between the body and the rear combination light to make the removal smooth.

Remove the bolts (3) and pull the rear combination light (4) firmly to the rearward.

Remove the wire (6) from a clamp (7).
To remove the bulb holder of the rear turn signal light (8) or the reversing light (9) from the light housing, turn the holder counterclockwise and pull it out.
- Removal
- Installation
To remove the bulb of the rear turn signal light (8) from the bulb holder, push in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise. To install a new bulb, push it in and turn it clockwise. To remove and install the bulb of the reversing light (9), simply pull out or push in the bulb.

NOTE:
When reinstalling the light housing, check that the clips are properly attached.

License Plate Light

Remove the cover (1) by turning it counterclockwise. 73R0192.
To remove and install the bulb of the license plate light (2), simply pull out or push in the bulb.

High-mount Stop Light
LED is used. It is recommended that you take your vehicle to a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for bulb replacement since special procedures are required.

Interior Light

Rear

Remove the lens by using a flat-bladed screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown. To install it, simply push it back in. The bulb can be removed by simply pulling it out. When replacing the bulb, make sure that the contact springs are holding the bulb securely.

Wiper Blades

If the wiper blades become brittle or damaged, or make streaks when wiping, replace the wiper blades. To install new wiper blades, follow the procedures below.

NOTICE
To avoid scratching or breaking the window, do not let the wiper arm strike the window while replacing the wiper blade.

NOTE:
Some wiper blades may be different from the ones described here depending on vehicle specifications. If so, consult a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for proper replacement method.

For windshield wipers:

Hold the wiper arm away from the window.
NOTE:
When raising both of the front wiper arms, pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first. When returning the wiper arms, lower the passenger’s side wiper arm first. Other-wise, the wiper arms may interfere with each other.
Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2) and remove the wiper frame from the arm as shown.
Unlock the lock end of the wiper blade and slide the blade out as shown.
If the new blade is provided without the two metal retainers (3), move them from the old blade to the new one.
- Up
- Down

NOTE:
When you install the metal retainers (3), make sure the direction of metal retainers as shown in the above illustrations.

Locked end
Install the new blade in the reverse order of removal, with the locked end
positioned toward the wiper arm. Make sure the blade is properly retained by all the hooks. Lock the blade end into place.
Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making sure that the lock lever is snapped securely into the arm.

For rear wipers:

Hold the wiper arm away from the window.
Remove the wiper frame from the wiper arm as shown.
Slide the blade out as shown.

NOTE:
Do not flex the wiper blade frame end more than necessary. If you do, it can break off.

If the new blade is provided without the two metal retainers, move them from the old blade to the new one.
Install the new blade in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the blade is properly retained by all the hooks.
Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the reverse order of removal.

Windshield Washer Fluid

Check that there is washer fluid in the tank. Refill it if necessary. Use a good quality windshield washer fluid, diluted with water as necessary.

WARNING
Do not use radiator antifreeze solution in the windshield washer reservoir. This can severely impair visibility when sprayed on the wind-shield, and also can damage your vehicle’s paint.

NOTICE
Damage may result if the washer motor is operated with no fluid in the washer tank.

Air Conditioning System

If you do not use the air conditioner for a long period, such as during winter, it may not give the best performance when you start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air conditioner, it needs to be run periodically. Operate the air conditioner at least once a month for one minute with the engine idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil and helps protect the internal components.

Air Conditioner Filter Replacement
Since special procedures are required, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for this job.

To approach the air conditioner filter, remove the glove box by pressing both sides of the glove box inward and pulling it out. 73R0202.
Remove the cover (1) and pull out the air conditioner filter (2).

NOTE:
When you install a new filter, check that the UP mark (3) faces upward.

FAQ

Q: How often should I schedule routine maintenance for my 2018 Suzuki Ertiga?

A: Routine maintenance for the Suzuki Ertiga is typically recommended at regular intervals, such as every 5,000 to 10,000 kilometers, depending on your driving conditions and the maintenance schedule outlined in your owner’s manual.

Q: What are the key maintenance tasks I should perform at each service interval?

A: Common maintenance tasks include oil changes, air filter replacement, tire rotation, brake inspection, and fluid checks.

Q: Is it necessary to use genuine Suzuki parts and fluids for maintenance?

A: Using genuine Suzuki parts and fluids is recommended to ensure optimal performance and reliability. However, reputable aftermarket options may also be suitable.

Q: Do I need to follow a specific maintenance schedule outlined by Suzuki?

A: Yes, it’s advisable to follow the maintenance schedule provided in the owner’s manual to keep your Ertiga in good condition and maintain its warranty coverage.

Q: What type of oil is recommended for the 2018 Suzuki Ertiga?

A: The recommended oil type can vary, but typically, a high-quality engine oil meeting Suzuki’s specifications should be used.

Q: How often should I check the tire pressure on my Ertiga?

A: Tire pressure should be checked regularly, at least once a month, to ensure they are properly inflated. Under-inflated or over-inflated tires can affect fuel efficiency and handling.

Q: What is the recommended tire rotation schedule?

A: Tire rotation is typically recommended every 10,000 kilometers to ensure even tire wear and prolong tire life.

Q: Should I have the wheel alignment and balancing checked during routine maintenance?

A: Yes, it’s a good practice to have the wheel alignment and balancing checked regularly, especially if you notice any unusual tire wear or handling issues.

Q: How often should I replace the engine air filter?

A: The engine air filter should be inspected at each service interval and replaced if it is dirty or clogged.

Q: Is there a recommended coolant change interval for the Ertiga?

A: The coolant change interval can vary, but it’s typically recommended every 30,000 to 50,000 kilometers. Check your owner’s manual for the specific interval.

Q: What should I do if my Ertiga’s check engine light comes on?

A: If the check engine light illuminates, it’s advisable to have your vehicle inspected by a qualified technician to diagnose and address any potential issues.

Q: Are there any recalls or service bulletins related to the 2018 Suzuki Ertiga?

A: You can check with your local Suzuki dealership or visit the official Suzuki website for information on any recalls or service bulletins related to your specific vehicle.

Q: Can I perform basic maintenance tasks on my own, or should I always visit a Suzuki service center?

A: Some basic maintenance tasks like checking tire pressure or changing the engine air filter can be done by the owner, but more complex tasks should be performed by a trained technician.

Q: Is there a recommended interval for replacing the timing belt?

A: The timing belt replacement interval can vary, but it’s generally recommended between 60,000 and 100,000 kilometers. Refer to your owner’s manual for specific guidance.

Q: Does Suzuki offer extended warranty options for the 2018 Ertiga?

A: Suzuki may offer extended warranty options for your Ertiga. You can inquire about these options at your local Suzuki dealership.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 User Manual
Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 SPECIFICATIONS User Manual

Tags Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, ERTIGA Inspection Maintenance, Inspection Maintenance, New ERTIGA, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT User Manual

CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Heating and Air Conditioning System

There are three types of heating and air conditioning systems as follows:

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
Digital air conditioning system
Automatic heating and air conditioning system (climate control)

Air Outlet

Windshield defroster outlet
Side defroster outlet
Side outlet
Center outlet
Floor outlet
Cup holder outlet (if equipped)

Center outlet

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of air flow as desired.

Side outlet

Overhead Rear Air Conditioning System (if equipped)

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
To turn on the overhead rear air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector of the manual heating and air conditioning system to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. Refer to “Air conditioning switch” in this section. And set the rear blower speed selector (2) to a position other than off.

(Manual Air Conditioning System)
To turn on the overhead rear air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector of the manual heating and air conditioning system to a position other than off and turn the Temperature selector to a position other than “OFF”. Refer to “Temperature selector with air conditioning switch” in this section. And set the rear blower speed selector (2) to a position other than off.

(Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System)
To turn on the overhead rear air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector of the manual heating and air conditioning system to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. Refer to “Air conditioning switch” in this section. And set the rear blower speed selector (2) to a position other than off.
Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of air flow as desired.
During operation of the air conditioner, you may notice slight changes in engine speed. These changes are normal, the system is designed so that the compressor turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature. Less operation of the compressor results in better fuel economy.

Description of Controls

Temperature selector with air conditioning switch
Blower speed selector
Air flow selector
Air intake selector

Temperature selector with air conditioning switch (1)
This is used to adjust the temperature. Also, this is used to turn on and off the air conditioning system by turning the selector. To turn on the air conditioning system, turn the selector to a position other than “OFF”. When this selector is in “OFF”, the air conditioning system will not turn on.

NOTE:
During operation of the air conditioner, you may notice slight changes in engine speed. These changes are normal, the system is designed so that the compressor turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature. Less operation of the compressor results in better fuel economy.

Blower speed selector (2)
This is used to turn on the blower and to select blower speed.

Air flow selector (3)

This is used to select one of the following functions.

Ventilation (a)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the center, side and cup holder outlets (if equipped).

Bi-level (b)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets and cooler air comes out of the center, side and cup holder outlets (if equipped). When the temperature selector (1)is in the fully cold position, however, the air from the floor outlets and the air from the center, side and cup holder outlets (if equipped) will be the same temperature.

Air intake selector (4)

This selector is used to select the following modes.

Recirculated Air (c)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to left, outside air is shut out and inside air is recirculated. This mode is suitable when driving through dusty or polluted air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting to quickly cool down the interior.

Fresh Air (d)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to right, outside air comes in.

System Operating Instructions

Head cooled/Feet warmed heating Select BI-LEVEL and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Unless the temperature selector is in the full cold position or fully hot position, the air that comes out of the center and side outlets will be cooler than the air that comes out of the floor outlets.

Normal cooling
Set the air flow selector to VENTILATION, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position, and turn on “A/C” switch. Setting the blower speed selector to a higher blower speed position increases cooling efficiency.
You can switch the air intake selector to either FRESH AIR or RECIRCULATED AIR as you desire. Choosing CIRCULATED AIR increases cooling efficiency.
Quick cooling (using recirculated air) The base settings are the same as for nor-mal cooling except you select CIRCULATED AIR and the highest blower speed.

NOTE:
If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated and the windows tend to get misted. There-fore, you should select FRESH AIR whenever possible.

If your vehicle has been left in the sun with the windows closed, it will cool faster if you open the windows briefly while you operate the air conditioner with the air intake selector at FRESH AIR and the blower at high speed.

NOTE:
Because the air conditioner dehumidifies the air, turning it on will help keep the windows clear, even when blowing heated air using DEFROST or HEAT & DEFROST functions.

Maintenance
If you do not use the air conditioner for a long period, such as during winter, it may not give the best performance when you start using it again. To help maintain optimum performance and durability of your air conditioner, it needs to be run periodically. Operate the air conditioner at least once a month for one minute with the engine idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil and helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equipped with air filters, clean or replace them as specified in “Maintenance Schedule” in “INSPEC-TION AND MAINTENANCE” section. Have this job done by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as the lower glove box must be lowered for this job.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System

Description of Controls

Temperature selector
Blower speed selector
Air intake selector
Air flow selector
Air conditioning switch

Temperature selector (1)

This selector is used to select the following modes.

FRESH AIR (a)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to left, outside air comes in.

Air intake selector (3) (Right-hand drive vehicle)

This selector is used to select the following modes.

RECIRCULATED AIR (a)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to left, outside air is shut out and inside air is recirculated. This mode is suit-able when driving through dusty or polluted air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting to quickly cool down or warm up the inte-rior.

FRESH AIR (b)
When this mode is selected by moving the lever to right, outside air comes in.

Air flow selector (4)

This is used to select one of the following functions.

VENTILATION (c)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the center and side outlets.

HEAT (e)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

HEAT & DEFROST (f)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

DEFROST (g)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of the windshield defroster outlets, the side defroster outlets and the side outlets.

Air conditioning switch (5)
To turn on the air conditioning system, set the blower speed selector to a position other than off and push in “A/C” switch. With this “A/C” switch operation, a indicator light will come on when the air conditioning system is working. To turn off the air conditioning system, push “A/C” switch again.
During operation of the air conditioner, you may notice slight changes in engine speed. These changes are normal, the system is designed so that the compressor turns on or off to maintain the desired temperature. Less operation of the compressor results in better fuel economy.

System Operating Instructions

Forced ventilation
The base settings are the same as for natural ventilation except you set the blower speed selector to a position other than off.
Normal heating (using outside air) Select HEAT and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Set-ting the blower speed selector to a higher blower speed position increases heating efficiency.
Quick heating (using recirculated air) The base settings are the same as for nor-mal heating except you select CIRCULATED AIR. If you use this heating method for an extended period of time, the air in the vehicle can become contaminated and the windows can become misty. Therefore, use this method only for quick heating and change to the normal heating method as soon as possible. Head cooled/Feet warmed heating Select BI-LEVEL and FRESH AIR, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position, and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position. Unless the temperature selector is in the fully cold position or fully hot position, the air that comes out of the center and side outlets will be cooler than the air that comes out of the floor outlets.

Normal cooling
Set the air flow selector to VENTILATION, the temperature selector to the desired temperature position and the blower speed selector to the desired blower speed position, and turn on “A/C” switch. Setting the blower speed selector to a higher blower speed position increases cooling efficiency.
You can switch the air intake selector to either FRESH AIR or RECIRCULATED AIR as you desire. Choosing CIRCULATED AIR increases cooling efficiency.
Quick cooling (using recirculated air) The base settings are the same as for nor-mal cooling except you select RECIRCU-LATED AIR and the highest blower speed.

If your vehicle has been left in the sun with the windows closed, it will cool faster if you open the windows briefly while you operate the air conditioner with the air intake selector at FRESH AIR and the blower at high speed.

NOTE:
Because the air conditioner dehumidifies the air, turning it on will help keep the windows clear, even when blowing heated air using DEFROST or HEAT & DEFROST functions.

NOTE:
If you need maximum defrosting:

Select DEFROST and FRESH AIR,
Set the blower speed selector to high,
Adjust the temperature selector to the hot end,
Turn on the “A/C” switch, and
Adjust the side outlets so the air blows on the side windows.

NOTICE
Using the wrong refrigerant may damage your air conditioning system. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or replace the R-134a with other refrigerants.

Radio Antenna

The radio antenna on the roof is removable. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn it clockwise firmly by hand.

NOTICE
To avoid damage to the radio antenna:

Remove the antenna when using an automatic car wash.
Remove the antenna when the antenna hits anything such as a low ceiling in a parking garage or putting a car cover over your vehicle.

Audio System (if equipped)

Keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive. Avoid paying too much attention to operating the audio system or watching the audio system display.
Familiarize yourself with the audio system controls and operation of the audio system before driving.
Preset your favorite radio stations before driving so that you can quickly tune to them using the presets.
Set the sound volume to a level that will allow you to continue to be aware of surrounding road and traffic conditions while driving.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks and are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Ink.

Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth® ready device whenever requested
This unit shares the communication frequency with other private or public wireless communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless communication radios.
You should stop using this unit immediately whenever you are notified that your unit disturbs other wireless communication.

Basic Operations

POWER button
“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“ENTER” button
BACK button
SETUP button
“VOLUME” button

Turning power on/off
Touch the POWER button (1).
The audio system starts in the function mode it was in when the power was turned off last.

Touching the POWER button (1) for 1 second or longer can turn off the audio system.

Slide touch operation
Operate several functions with the slide touch operation. Touch the panel and slide up or down with your finger for increase/decrease or up/down operation.

NOTE:
Pay caution to the following content regarding slide touch operation:
The touch button may not operate properly when the touch panel or your fingers are wet. Remove any liquid before operating.

Depending on the operation method it may react without touching.
It may not react properly when operated with gloves on.
When metal objects are placed near the touch panel it may cause a malfunction.
Do not attach protective film. Otherwise, the touch panel may not operate properly.

Functions available with the slide touch operation

Mode	Function
Common	Volume up/down	O	–
Common	Item selection	–	O
Radio	TUNE up/down	–	O
USB	File up/down	–	O
USB	Folder up/down (folder operation mode)	–	O
iPod	TRACK up/down	–	O
iPod	Category selection (iPod menu)	–	O
Bluetooth® audio	TRACK up/down	–	O
Bluetooth® audio	Group up/down (Group operation mode)	–	O
Hands-free	Reception/ringtone/incoming call volume up/down	O	–
Hands-free	Switching pages of the speed dial selection screen	–	O

Adjusting the volume
Touch or slide the “VOLUME” button (6).

To increase the volume, touch or slide upwards.
To decrease the volume, touch or slide downwards.

NOTE:
While driving, adjust the volume to an extent that sound and/or noise coming from outside can be heard.

Sound settings

Touch the SETUP button (5).
- Touch for 1 second or longer when using radio mode.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select “Sound”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The sound setting screen will be displayed.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (2), select the desired item, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The sound settings will change as follows:
  EQ ↔ Bass ↔ Treble ↔ Balance ↔ Fader ↔ AVC

Preset EQ
The preset EQ can set various types of sounds depending on the type of music.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “EQ”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select the desired item, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The preset EQ settings will change as follows:
  Off (Flat) ↔ Jazz ↔ Rock ↔ Pop ↔ Classic ↔ Hip-hop

Adjusting bass/treble/balance /fader The preset EQ can set various types of sounds depending on the type of music.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance”, or “Fader” and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), adjust to the desired settings and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- “Bass”/“Treble”:
- Can be adjusted in stages from -6 to 0 to +6.
- Touch to emphasize the low or high sounds, and touch to quiet.
- Balance”:
- Can be adjusted in 9 stages left to right.
  Touch to emphasize the right speaker, and touch to emphasize the left speaker.
- “Fader”:
- Can be adjusted in 9 stages back to front.
  Touch to emphasize the front speaker, and touch to emphasize the rear speaker.

Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume control)
The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function automatically adjusts (increases/decreases) the sound volume in accordance with vehicle speed. The AVC control is provided with three selectable levels (LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume adjustment increases together with the LEVEL number.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “AVC”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Down button (2) from the “Sound” screen, select “AVC”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select the desired level, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The AVC will change as follows:
  Off ↔ Level 1 ↔ Level 2 ↔ Level 3

System Settings
Change the “Beep”, “Slide”, and “SW Sensitivity” settings.

Touch the SETUP button (5).
Touch for 1 second or longer when using radio mode.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select “System”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
- The system setting screen will be dis-played.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (2), select the desired item, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

The system settings will change as follows:
Beep ↔ Slide ↔ SW Sensitivity

BEEP on/off

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “System” screen, select “Beep”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select on or off, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

Slide touch operation settings
Turn the slide operation on/off.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “System” screen, select “Slide”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select on or off, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

Touch panel sensitivity settings
Change the touch panel sensitivity.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2) from the “System” screen, select “SW Sensitivity”, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (2), select Low or High, and touch the “ENTER” button (3).

NOTE:
If the touch button sensitivity is too high, set to “Low”.

Radio

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
Preset button
“RADIO” button*1
“CH” (channel) button
“AS” (auto store) button

Use this button to switch between manual preset and auto preset.

Display
Manual preset

Auto preset

Frequency
Band
Auto Store mode display
NOTE:
Radio Reception
Radio reception can be affected by environment, atmospheric conditions, or radio signal’s power and distance from the station. Nearby mountains and buildings may interfere or deflect radio reception, causing poor reception. Poor reception or radio static can also be caused by electric cur-rent from overhead wires or high voltage power lines.

Selecting the band

Touch the “RADIO” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
- AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM(AS) → FM(AS).

Seek tuning

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) for 1 second or longer.
The audio system stops searching for a station at a frequency where a broadcast station is available.

Manual tuning

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) to select the desired station.

Storing the station Manual store

Select the station and frequency.
Touch and hold the “CH” button (4) for at least 1 second.
Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6]) of the Preset buttons (2) to which you want to store the station for 2 seconds or longer.

NOTE:
6 stations can be stored for AM, and 6 stations for each of FM1 and FM2, thus 18 stations can be stored in total.

Auto store

Touch the “AS” button (5) for 1 second or longer.

Start searching from a station whose frequency is the lowest. When a broadcast station that can be received with a sufficient strength is discovered, it will be assigned to the AM (AS)/FM (AS) band’s preset button (2). Once this process is completed the tuner will return to the first stored broadcast station.

NOTE:
Auto store can be released by touching the “AS” button (5) while auto store is under way.
When the auto store is performed, the station previously stored in the memory at the position is overwritten. 6 stations can be preset for FM, and 6 stations for AM in auto store mode.

Select from the preset channels Manual preset channel

Select the radio station and frequency.
Touch the “CH” button (4) for 1 second or longer.
Touch a desired button ([1] to [6]) of the Preset buttons (2).
NOTE:
Touch and hold the “CH” button (4) for at least one second to select from the preset channel list.

Auto preset channel

Touch the “RADIO” button (3) for 1 second mor longer　and select AM (AS) or FM (AS).
Touch the “CH” button (4) for 1 second or longer.
- The preset channel list is displayed.
Touch a desired button ([1] to [6]) of the Preset buttons (2).

USB

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“DISP/ENTER” button
BACK button
“FLD” (folder operation) button
SETUP (random/repeat) button
“MEDIA” button

Display

Play time
Text information display

Selecting a USB device mode

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6).

Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped).

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

Hold down the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1).

Hold down the Up button for 1 second or longer to fast forward the track.
Hold down the Down button for 1 second or longer to fast rewind the track.
Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding.

Selecting a track

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).

Touch the Up button to listen to the next track.
When the Down button is touched once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Touch the Down button twice to listen to the previous track.

Selecting a folder

Touch the “FLD” (folder operation) but-ton (4).
Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).
- Touch the Up button to move to the next folder.
- Touch the Down button to move to the previous folder.

Repeat playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) but-ton (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Repeat”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
- Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, the mode will change as follows:
  Off → Folder random → All random .

Random playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) but-ton (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Random”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2). Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, the mode will change as fol-lows:
Off → Folder random → All random .

Display change

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
MP3/AAC:
Artist name/Track title → Album name/Track title → Folder name/File name… WMA:
Artist name/Track title → Folder name/File name.

NOTE:

“NO TITLE” will be displayed when there is no text information in the USB device currently being played.
“…” is displayed if all text data cannot be displayed. Touch and hold the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) for at least 1 second to automatically display the rest of the text data.

Notes on USB device Compatible USB devices

USB Mass Storage Class
For details as to whether your USB memory/USB Audio is compatible with USB Mass Storage Class, please con-tact the USB memory/USB Audio manufacturer.
Audio file
MP3 (.mp3)/WMA (.wma)/AAC (.m4a)/AAC (.aac)
File System
FAT 12/16/32,VFAT (supporting long file name)
USB Standard Compatibility
1.1/2.0 Full Speed
If a USB hub or extension cable is connected to the audio system, it may not be recognized. In this case, directly con-nect the USB device to the audio system.
Devices such as MP3 players/mobile phones/digital cameras may not be recognized as audio systems for playing music.

USB device connection

When connecting a USB device, make sure that the connector is pushed all the way into the port.
Depending on the USB flash drive that you are using, (non-brand product, USB flash drive that has been externally dam-aged) it may disable connection or cause unstable operation.
Do not leave the USB device for long periods of time in places inside the vehicle where the temperature can rise too high.
Back up any important data beforehand. We cannot accept responsibility for any lost data.
It is recommended not to connect a USB device that contains data files other than MP3/WMA format.

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a USB device

Playback or display may not be possible depending on the type of USB device in use or the condition of the recording.
Depending on the connected USB memory, the files may be played in different order from the order that the files were stored.
The DRM (Digital Rights Management) file cannot be played.

Compression formats MP3

Bit rate
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 up to 320 kbps MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 up to 160 kbps MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 up to 160 kbps
VBR: up to 384 kbps (MAX.)
Sampling frequency
MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32/44.1/48 kHz MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16/22.05/24 kHz MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8/11.025/12 kHz
Channel
Stereo/Joint stereo/Dual channel/Mon-aural
ID3 tag
ID3v1.x/ID3v2.x

WMA

Windows Media Audio Ver.7/Ver.8/Ver.9 Standard compliant
Bit rate: 32 up to 320 kbps
VBR: up to 384 kbps (MAX.)
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
WMA tag: Ver.8.0
Channel: 2 Channels

AAC

Bit rate: 16 up to 320 kbps
VBR: up to 320 kbps (MAX.)
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
AAC tag: iTunes m4a metadata

Maximum number of files/folders

Maximum number of files: 2500
Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
Maximum number of folders: 255
- Root folder and empty folder are included.
Maximum depth of tree structure: 8

iPod

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“DISP/ENTER” button
BACK button
“FLD” (iPod menu) button
SETUP (shuffle/repeat) button
“MEDIA” button

Display

Play time
Text information display

Selecting an iPod mode

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6).`

Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

Hold down the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).

Hold down the Up button for 1 second or longer to fast forward the track. : Hold down the Down button for 1 second or longer to fast rewind the track.
Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding.

Selecting a track

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).

Touch the Up button to listen to the next track.
When the Down button is touched once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Touch the Down button twice to listen to the previous track.

Select a category

Touch the “FLD” (iPod menu) button 4
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select the desired category, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

The Song selection mode for each cate-gory will be displayed as follows.
Playlists: Playlists → Songs
Artists: Artists → Albums → Songs
Songs: Songs
Genres: Genres → Artists → Albums
Songs
Radio: Station
Audiobooks: Audiobooks
Podcasts: Podcasts → Episodes
i Tunes U: i Tunes U → Episodes

NOTE:
Categories is not displayed if the no files in the category.

Repeat playback

Touch the SETUP (shuffle/repeat) but-ton (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Repeat”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2). Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
The repeat mode will vary depending on your device.
Off → 1 song repeat → All repeat .

Random playback

Touch the SETUP (shuffle/repeat) button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/
Down button (1), select “Shuffle”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
Off → Shuffle → Album shuffle …

Display change

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).

Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
Artist name/Track title → Album name/
Track title → Playlist name/Track title…

NOTE:

“NO TITLE” is displayed if the file currently being played has no text data.
“…” is displayed if all text data cannot be displayed. Touch and hold the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) for at least one sec-ond to automatically display the rest of the text data.
“Playlist name/song name” is only dis-played by the “FLD” (Menu) button (4) when music is selected from Playlists.

Notes on iPod
Made for iPod

iPod nano :
- iPod nano (7th generation)
iPod touch :
- iPod touch (6th generation)
i Pod touch (5th generation)
iPhone :
- i Phone 5
- i Phone 5s
- i Phone 5c
- i Phone 6
- i Phone 6 Plus
- i Phone 6s
- i Phone 6s Plus
- i Phone SE
- i Phone 7
- i Phone 7 Plus

NOTE:
Some functions may not be available depending on the model of iPod.

iPod

Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple product(s) identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless performance.
Apple, iPod nano, iPod touch, iPhone, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

AUX

“MEDIA” button

Display

NOTICE

Before connection, mute the unit, and also keep the volume of the auxiliary audio source within a range that will not cause distortion.
When the audio source is turned off, noise may be emitted. Be sure to turn off the unit or switch to another mode before turning off the audio source.

AUX selection

Touch the “MEDIA” button (1).

Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

NOTE:

Please consult your place of purchase for details about whether a given auxiliary audio source can be connected and the proper auxiliary cord to use.

Setting of Bluetooth® Devices

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“ENTER” button
BACK button
SETUP button
Bluetooth® button
Off-hook button

CAUTION
Do not register or set the Bluetooth® device while driving. Stop your vehicle in a safe area before registering the device.

NOTE:

Certain functions cannot be used depending on the Bluetooth® device.
Refer to the user manual included with your device regarding the operation method of Bluetooth® devices.
If the pairing cannot be established, the connection operation is canceled.
For the Bluetooth® device pairing method, refer to the user manual included with your device or try pairing again.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
Touch the SETUP button (4).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2). From the panel button:
Touch the SETUP button (4).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- The passkey will be displayed.
Operate and register the Bluetooth® device.
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) incompatible Bluetooth® device:
Enter the passkey into the Bluetooth® device.
Secure Simple Pairing (SSP) compatible Bluetooth® device:
Select “Yes” to register the Bluetooth® device.

It is possible to automatically register devices depending on the type of Blue-tooth® device.
NOTE:

Set from the list of mobile phones The list of paired mobile phones is dis-played and the various settings can be changed.
The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
- Touch the SETUP button (4).
- Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “List Phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Connect a registered mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Phone” screen, select the name of the desired mobile phone, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Select”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Disconnect a connected mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Phone” screen, select the name of the desired mobile phone, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Disconnect”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Delete a registered mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Phone” screen, select the name of the desired mobile phone, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Delete”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Set from the Bluetooth® audio list The list of paired Bluetooth® audio is dis-played and the various settings can be changed.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
  From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “List Audio”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Connect a registered Bluetooth® audio

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Select”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Disconnect a registered Bluetooth® audio

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Disconnect”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Delete a registered Bluetooth® audio

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Delete”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Select a connection method
It is possible to switch connection methods when the Bluetooth® audio is registered to the audio system and the audio system and Bluetooth® audio are not connected.

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “List Audio” screen, select the name of the desired Bluetooth® audio, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Connect Method”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the connection method, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From Vehicle:
  Operate from the audio system to connect to the Bluetooth® device.
- From Audio:
  Operate from the Bluetooth® device to connect to the audio system.

Change of Passkey

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch
  Press the Bluetooth® button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Passkey”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select a number between 0 and 9, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Repeat this operation several times.
- Enter the passkey one digit by one digit.
- The passkey must be between 4 to 8 digits.
- In order to cancel the number that you entered and return to the previous digit, touch the BACK button (3).
- If you do not enter a number that is 4 or more digits and re-touch the “ENTER” button (2), the passkey will be registered.

Automatic connection with the Blue-tooth® device
If the “Bluetooth Power” is set to ON, turning the ignition switch to ACC will automatically connect the registered Bluetooth® device.

With the automatic connection, the Blue-tooth® device that was connected last will be prioritized.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth Power”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “On” or “Off”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

NOTE:

When “Bluetooth Power” is set to “OFF”, the audio system disconnects from the registered Bluetooth® device.
If “Bluetooth Power” is set to “Off”, the audio system will not automatically reconnect the next time the ignition is switched on.

The device status will be displayed

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
- Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth Info”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired status, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- To display the device name, select “Device Name”.
- To display the device address, select “Device Address”.

Initialize
It is possible to initialize the audio system’s Bluetooth® settings or device information.

CAUTION

Do not initialize the settings while driving. Stop your vehicle in a safe area before initializing the device.
Initialize with caution. Initialized settings and history cannot be restored.

The Bluetooth® setting screen will be displayed.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (4).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Initialize”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the item that you want to initialize item, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).
- HF Sound Setting:
  - Reception/ringtone volume
  - Incoming call volume
- Vehicle Device Info:
  Passkey
- All Initialize:
  - Reception/ringtone volume
  - Incoming call volume
  - Bluetooth audio volume
  - Pairing registration
  - Phonebook/history
  - Speed dial
  - Connect Method
  - Bluetooth Power
  - Auto Transfer
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (2).

Notes on Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Blue-tooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Denso Ten Limited is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This telecommunication equipment con-forms to the requirements of the National Telecommunications Commission.
Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth® ready device whenever requested. This unit shares the communication frequency with other private or public wire-less communication equipment such as a wireless LAN and other wireless communication radios.
You should stop using this unit immediately whenever you are notified that your unit disturbs other wireless communication.

Profile

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing)
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
HFP (Hand-Free Profile)
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile)

Display

Steering switch

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
Speed dial button (1-6)
SETUP button
“VOLUME” button
BACK button
“ENTER” button
Bluetooth® setting button
Off-hook button
On-hook button
Mute button
“VOL” (volume) button

NOTICE

Do not leave your mobile phone inside your vehicle. If the temperature inside the vehicle increases, it may damage your mobile phone.
When disposing your vehicle, make sure to delete all personal information saved to the audio system.
The following hands-free data must be deleted from the audio system.
- Speed dial
- Reception history/Incoming call history
- Bluetooth® phonebook data

NOTE:

Please keep your phone volume low. The person’s voice who you are talking to may be heard outside of the vehicle and increase the voice echo. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone.
In the following cases, your voice may not be heard clearly by the person on the other line:
- When driving on unpaved roads. (If there is loud traffic noise.)
- When driving at high speeds.
- When driving with the window open.
- If the air conditioner is blowing directly towards the microphone.
- When the sound of the air conditioner fan is loud.
  When there is an adverse effect to the sound quality of the phone or network that you are using.
The audio system may not function under the following conditions.
- When the phone power is not turned on.
- When the mobile phone is out of service.
- When the mobile phone is not connected.
- When the mobile phone battery is low
The Bluetooth’s hands-free operation is dependent upon the mobile phone’s compatibility.
The Bluetooth’s hands-free performance is affected by the driving conditions of mobile phone networks, handsets and vehicles.
The audio system’s performance may be restricted due to the model of your mobile phone.

It is possible to register a mobile phone and register the phone number to the audio system as follows:

- Up to 1,000 phone numbers can be saved for every registered mobile phone.
  Up to 30 phone numbers can be saved to the call history menu (missed calls/incoming/outgoing calls.)
- When the call history exceeds 30 calls, they are deleted from the oldest one first, and the latest call history information is displayed in descending order.
- Up to 6 phone numbers can be saved to the speed dial list.

Answer the phone

Press the off-hook button (8).
- When you press the on-hook button (9) during an incoming call, you can block the call. (Only for compatible phone units)

NOTE:

If you receive a call from a registered phone, the caller’s name will appear on the screen.
If you receive a call from an unregistered phone, only the caller’s phone number will appear on the screen.

Hang up the phone

When the call is finished, press the on-hook button (9).

Make a call on call waiting
When the screen is displayed during a call, it is possible to hold the call and answer the other incoming call.

When an incoming call is received during a call, press the off-hook button (8).

When the call is on hold, it will connect to the other incoming call.
To end the call waiting, press the off-hook button (8).
When the call waiting is completed, the call on hold will connect.
When switching the caller, press the off-hook button (8) again while using the call waiting.

NOTE:
This function can only be used with phone units that are compatible with call waiting.

Mute the ringtone volume

Press the mute button (10).

To deactivate the mute volume, press the mute button (10).

Adjust the volume
Adjust the reception volume

Touch or slide the “VOLUME” button (4) or press the “VOL” button (11) during a call.
- To increase the volume, touch or slide upwards.
- To decrease the volume, touch or slide downwards.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “HF Sound Set-ting”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the item that you want to adjust, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- Call Volume: Reception/ringtone volume
- Ringtone Volume: Incoming call volume
Touch or slide the “VOLUME” button (4).
- To increase the volume, touch or slide upwards.
- To decrease the volume, touch or slide downwards.

Make a call
Press the off-hook button (8) to enter the telephone mode.

Use the phonebook

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Phonebook”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired initials, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the contact number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- If there are multiple phone numbers for a single contact, touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the phone number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select “Yes”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6) or press the off-hook button (8).

Use the call history

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “All Calls,” “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the contact number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Yes”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6) or press the off-hook button (8).

Use the speed dial

Press the Off-hook button (8) for 1 second or longer.
Touch the desired speed dial button (2)(1-6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/
Down button (1), select “YES”, and then touch the “ENTER” button (6) or press the Off-hook button (8).

NOTE:
Speed dial numbers must be registered before this function can be used.

Transfer/delete the phonebook

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Phone-book”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer all contacts from your mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Phonebook” screen, select “Add Contacts”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Overwrite All”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer 1 contact from your mobile phone

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Phonebook” screen, select “Add Con-tacts”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Add One Con-tact”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Delete the registered phonebook

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Phonebook” screen, select “Delete Contacts”, and touch the “ENTER” but-ton (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired initials from the list or “All”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- When you select “All”, it will transition to step 4.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired name from the list, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer/delete the call history

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Call His-tory”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Transfer the call history

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Call History” screen, select “Overwrite His-tory”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Delete the call history

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Call History” screen, select “Delete His-tory”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “All Calls”, “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the TUNE/TRACK Up/Down button (1), select the desired data from the history or select “All“, and then touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Registration / deletion of speed dial

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Speed Dials”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Registration in speed dial

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Speed Dials” screen, select “Add Speed Dial”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the phonebook or call history, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- When you select the call history, it will transition to step 4.
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the desired initials from the list and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the contact number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- If there are multiple phone numbers for a single contact, touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the phone number, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select the speed dial number that you want to register, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Deletion of speed dial

Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1) from the “Setup Speed Dials” screen, select “Delete Speed Dials”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select the speed dial number that you want to delete, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “YES”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

Display the Bluetooth® setup menu.
- From the panel button:
  Touch the SETUP button (3).
  Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Bluetooth”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
- From the steering switch:
  Press the Bluetooth® button (7).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Setup Tele-phone”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “Auto Transfer”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1), select “On” or “Off”, and touch the “ENTER” button (6).

“TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button
“DISP/ENTER” button
BACK button
“FLD” (group operation) button
SETUP (random/repeat) button
“MEDIA” button

Display

Playback time
Text information display

NOTE:
Some functions may not be usable on some Bluetooth® devices.
Selecting the Bluetooth® audio

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6).

Touch the “MEDIA” button (6). Each time the button is touched, the mode will change as follows:
USB (iPod) (if equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

Hold down the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1).
- Hold down the Up button for 1 second or longer to fast forward the track.
- Hold down the Down button for 1 second or longer to fast rewind the track.
- Releasing the button can stop the fast forwarding/rewinding.

Selecting a track

Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).
- Touch the Up button to listen to the next track.
- When the Down button is touched once, the track currently being played will start from the beginning again. Touch the Down button twice to listen to the previous track.

Selecting a group (only for supported models)

Touch the “FLD” (group operation) button (4).
Touch the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/Down button (1).
- Touch the Up button to go to the next group.
- Touch the Down button to go to the previous group.

Repeat playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select “Repeat”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
- Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, display will change as follows:
  Off → One song repeat → Group repeat …

Random playback

Touch the SETUP (random/repeat) button (5).
Touch or slide the “TUNE/TRACK” Up/ Down button (1), select “Random”, and touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2)
- Each time the “DISP/ENTER” button (2) is touched, display will change as follows:
  Off → One song repeat →
  Group repeat

Display change

Touch the “DISP/ENTER” button (2).
- Each time the button is touched, display will change as follows:
  Artist name/Track title → Album name/ Track title…
  NOTE:
- “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there is no text information in the USB device currently being played.
- “…” is displayed if all text data cannot be displayed. Touch and hold the “DISP/
  ENTER” button (2) for at least one second to automatically display the rest of the text data.

Anti-Theft Feature
The anti-theft function is intended to dis-courage thefts, such as that the audio system becomes inoperable when it is installed on other vehicles.
This function works by entering a Personal Identification Number (PIN).
When the unit is disconnected from its power source, such as when the audio system is removed or the battery is disconnected, the unit will become inoperable until the PIN is reentered.

POWER button
List selection button
“ENTER” button
BACK button
PIN entry button (1-4)

Display

Setting the Anti-Theft Function

Touch the POWER button (1) for 1 second or longer to power off the audio system.
Hold down the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5) and the
“ENTER” button (3) and touch the POWER button (1).
- “SECURITY” will be displayed.
Hold down the Up button of the List selection button (2) and the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5).
- “—-” will be displayed.
Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] – [4] of the PIN entry button (5).
Touch the “ENTER” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- “COMPLETE” will be displayed, and the power will turns off after 3 seconds.

NOTE:
Take a note of the registered PIN and keep it for the future use.
Canceling the anti-theft feature
To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the registered PIN.

Touch the POWER button (1) for 1 second or longer to power off the audio system.
Hold down the buttons numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5) and the
“ENTER” button (3) and touch the POWER button (1).
- “PIN ENTRY” will be displayed.
Hold down the Up button of the List selection button (2) and the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5).
- “—-” will be displayed.
Enter a 4-digit number to be registered as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] – [4] of the PIN entry button (5).
Touch the “ENTER” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR* (ERR Number)” will be displayed for 3 seconds, then the audio system will go back to step 2.
- “—-” is displayed on the screen, and the power will turns off after 3 seconds.
  NOTE:
- To change your PIN, first delete your current PIN, then set a new one.
- If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times or more, “HELP” will be displayed and the audio system will become inoperable. In
  this case, contact a SUZUKI dealer.

Set the ignition switch to the ACC position.
1. “SECURITY” will be displayed.
Hold down the Up button of the List selection button (2) and the button numbered [1] of the PIN entry button (5).
- “—-” will be displayed.
Enter the registered 4-digit PIN number using the buttons numbered [1] – [4] of the PIN entry button (5).
Touch the “ENTER” button (3) for 1 second or longer.
- If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR* (ERR Number)” will be displayed for 3 seconds, then the audio system will go back to step 2.
- After 3 seconds, the power of the audio system will be turned off automatically and it will become operable again.

Steering Switch (if equipped)

Use the steering wheel button to operate the basic functions of the audio system

MODE button
Selection button
- Selecting the radio station
- Selecting the track (USB (iPod), Bluetooth
  ® audio mode)
- Mute button
- “VOL” (volume) button
  MODE button (1)
- Each time the button is pressed, the mode will change as follows:
  AM → FM1 → FM2 → USB (iPod) (if
  equipped) → Bluetooth® audio (if
  equipped) → AUX (if equipped)

Selection button (2)

FM1, FM2, AM mode:
- Press > to transfer to the next preset channel.
- Press < to transfer to the previous preset channel.
- Press > for 1 second or longer, it will
  search for receivable stations at a high frequency.
Press < for 1 second or longer, it will search for receivable stations at a low frequency.
USB (iPod), Bluetooth® audio mode:
- Press > to transfer to the next song.
  With the folder operation mode, it will transfer to the next folder.
- Press < to return to the beginning of the currently playing song. Pressing it twice consecutively will return to the previous song.
  With the folder operation mode, it will return to the previous folder.
- Press > for 1 second or longer to fast forward the song.
  When the button is released, it will stop fast-forwarding.
- Press < for 1 second or longer to rewind the song.
  Releasing the button can stop rewinding.
Mute button (3)
Hands-free mode Each time you press the button the mute will switch from ON/OFF.
USB (iPod), Bluetooth® audio mode:

Press the button during playback to temporarily
stop the playback.
“VOL” button (4)

Hands-free mode:
- Press during an outgoing or ingoing call, the reception/ringtone sound will increase.
- Press during an outgoing or ingoing call, the reception/ringtone sound will decrease.
- Press during an outgoing call, the ringtone sound will increase.
- Press during an outgoing call, the ringtone sound will decrease.

Radio, USB (iPod), Bluetooth® audio,

AUX mode:
Press , the volume will increase.
Press , the volume will decrease.

Troubleshooting

Problem

Possible cause

Possible solution

COMMON

Unable to operate

The security function is on.

When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter the ID. When “HELP” is displayed, contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Unable to turn on the power (no sound).

(No sound is produced)

Fuse is blown.

Contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work- shop.

Radio

Much noise	It may not be exactly tuned in to the station.	Tune it in exactly to the station.
Unable to receive by auto tuning	There may be no station emitting signals powerful enough.	Pick up a station by manual tuning.

USB

Playback does not start when the USB device is connected.

There is no supported format file to play on this unit.

Check the file format.

The current consumption of the USB device exceeds

1.0 A.

Use an USB device with a current consumption lower than 1.0 A.

Sound skips or noise produced

Sound skipping may occur when playing VBR (Vari- able Bit Rate) files.

It is not recommended to play VBR files.

Problem

Possible cause

Possible solution

Bluetooth

Pairing failed	The distance between this unit and the Bluetooth® ready device is too far, or a metallic object may be located between the Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.	Change the location of the Bluetooth® ready device.
Pairing failed	The Bluetooth® function of the Bluetooth® ready device is off.	Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth® ready device. (Some devices have the power saving function that automatically activates after a cer- tain time.)
Unable to receive a call	Your current location may be out of service area.	Drive your vehicle to the service area of the phone.
The voice quality of hands-free is low (Distortion, noise etc.)	Another wireless device may be located near the unit.	Switch off the wireless device or keep it away from the unit.

Error Display Messages
The following messages (flashing) will be displayed onto the screen depending on the condition of the audio system

Message

Description

Reading

When the USB device or iPod’s file format is being read,, this message will be displayed.

ERROR 1

When the USB device or iPod’s reading error occurs, this message will be displayed. Reconnect the USB device or iPod’s connection cable.

When the Bluetooth® audio playback malfunction occurs, this message will be displayed.

Check the Bluetooth® audio body.

Talk button (if equipped)

(1) Talk button

Importer: CFAO MOTORS TANZANIA LIMITED
Address: Pugu/Nyerere Road PO Box 40798 Dares Salaam Tanzania

Fuel Filler Cap

To remove the fuel filler cap:

Stop the engine and close all the doors and windows while refueling.
Open the fuel filler door.
Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

CAUTION
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel may be under pressure and may spray out, causing injury.

NOTE:
The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap (2) by hooking the groove (3) when refueling.
To reinstall the fuel filler cap:

Turn the cap clockwise until you hear several clicks.
Close the fuel filler door.

WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not smoke when refueling, and make sure there are no open flames or sparks in the area.

Engine Hood

WARNING

Never allow children to open or close the hood. Children may injure themselves because the hood is heavy. Contact with the engine compartment and related parts may cause burns when this area/these parts are hot.
Do not allow children to be near the vehicle when opening the hood.
Do not leave tools, cloths, and other objects, which were used to clean or perform maintenance and inspections, in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause operational failures or even the vehicle to catch fire when the engine compartment becomes hot.

To open the engine hood:

Pull the hood release handle located under the driver’s side instrument panel in the outboard position. This will disengage the engine hood lock halfway.
Push the under-hood release lever upward with your finger, as shown in the illustration. While pushing the lever, lift up the engine hood.
CAUTION
The release lever and its peripheral, or engine hood can be hot enough to burn your finger right after driving. Touch after those becomes cool enough.
NOTICE
Check that the wiper arms are not raised before you lift up the engine hood to avoid damaging the wiper arms and the engine hood.
While holding the hood, pull the prop rod out from the holding clip, and then insert the end of the rod into the designated hole.
CAUTION
- The prop rod can be hot enough to burn your finger right after driving. Touch the rod after it becomes cool enough.
- Insert the end of the rod into the hole securely. If the rod slips out, you may get caught in the closing hood.
- The rod may slip out when the hood is blown by wind. Be careful on windy days.

NOTICE
Hold the part make in * when removing the bracket from the holder.

To close the engine hood:

Lift the hood up slightly and remove the prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod back to the holding clip.
Lower the hood to about 20 cm above the hood latch, and then let it drop down. Make sure the hood is securely latched after closing.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched before driving. If it is not, it can fly up unexpectedly during driving, obstructing your view and resulting in an accident.

CAUTION
To avoid injury, check that no part of the occupant’s body such as hands or head is in the path of the hood when closing it.

NOTICE
Pushing on the hood from the top may damage it.

Sun Visor

The sun visor can be pulled down to block glare coming through the windshield, or they can be unhooked and turned to the side to block glare coming through the side window.

NOTICE
When unhooking and hooking a sun visor, handle it by the hard plastic parts or the sun visor can be dam-aged.

Vanity mirror (if equipped)

(1) Vanity mirror

WARNING

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to failure to pay attention to the road in front of you.
Do not place any weight on or come to close to the locations where an airbag is stored when using a vanity mirror. Doing so may cause the airbag to deploy and cause serious injury due to the impact of the airbag.

Interior Light

This light switch has two positions which function as described below:

Front (Type A)

Front (Type B)

Rear

Interior light switch has three positions which function as described below:

ON (1)
The light comes on and stays on regard-less of whether the door is open or closed.

NOTE:
The light will automatically be turned off to prevent the lead-acid battery from dis-charging when the following conditions are simultaneously met:

The ignition switch is in “LOCK” position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF).
The hazard warning lights, the position lights and the headlights are off.
After 15 minutes from the light on.

DOOR (2)

The light comes on when the door is opened. After closing all doors, the light will remain on for about 15 seconds and then fade out. If you insert the key, or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” during this time, the light will start to fade out immediately. After removing the key from the ignition switch or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), the light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out.
When the ignition switch is in LOCK position, or the ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF), to prevent the battery from dis-charging, the light will automatically be turned off when a period of 15 minutes has elapsed after any of the doors (including the tailgate) is opened and other operations are not done.

OFF (3)
The light remains off even when the door is opened.

Accessory Socket (if equipped)

Center Console

Floor Console (if equipped)

The accessory socket will work when the ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” position. This socket can be used to provide 12 volt/ 120 watt/10 ampere power for electrical accessories.

Assist Grips

Front Passenger’s Seat / 2rd Ro
3rd Row Seat
Assist grips are provided for convenience.

NOTICE
To avoid damaging the assist grip and the molded headlining, do not hang down the assist grip.

Glove Box

To open the glove box, pull the latch lever. To close it, push the lid until it latches securely.

WARNING
Never drive with the glove box lid open. It could cause injury if an accident occurs.

WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the lid of glove box open.

AUX/USB Socket (if equipped)

Connect your portable digital music player, etc. to this socket to enjoy music through the vehicle’s audio system. Refer to “Audio system (if equipped)” in this section.

NOTICE
Always close the cap when not in use, since entry of foreign material, dust, water, conductive liquids may damage the audio system or USB device.

WARNING
If you pay too much attention to operating the AUX/USB socket while driving, an accident may occur.

Cup Holder and Storage Area

Front

NOTE:

The temperature of air flow in cup holder is about the same with the center outlet.
There is no effect to cool the drink in the cup holder.

3rd Row Seats

WARNING
Failure to take the precautions listed below could cause personal injury or vehicle damage.

Be careful when you are using the cup holders to hold a cup containing liquid. Spilling out hot liquid can cause burn injury.
Do not use the cup holders to hold sharp-edged, hard, or breakable objects. Objects in the cup holders may be thrown about during a sudden stop or impact, and could cause personal injury.
Be careful not to spill liquid or insert any foreign materials into the moving part of the gearshift lever, or any electrical components. Liquid or foreign materials may dam-age these parts.
If you spill, or drop liquid accidentally, have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.
Bottle Holder
Front seats
2nd row seats

You should hold a bottle with a cap in the holder.

The rear armrest is stowed in the center of the seatback. Tilt it down forward to use.

Bill/Coin Holder

WARNING
Never drive with the bill/coin holder lid open. It could cause injury if an accident occurs.

Footrest (if equipped)

Use the footrest (1) as a support for your left foot and body.

Front Seat Back Pocket (if equipped)

This pocket is provided for holding light and soft things such as gloves, newspapers or magazines.

CAUTION
Do not put hard or breakable objects in the pocket. If an accident occurs, objects such as bottles, cans, etc. can injure the occupants in the rear seat.

Luggage Box (if equipped)

Insert your hands into the notches and lift up the luggage box cover to use the box.

NOTICE
Do not allow items in the box to extend above the top of the box. Otherwise, the box or cover may be dam-aged.

NOTICE
Observe the following instructions, not to break the luggage box cover.

Do not hold open the cover while driving.
Do not apply any load to the cover while holding it open.

Roof Rails (if equipped)

Roof Rails

Check that the roof rack is securely installed.
To mount various types of cargo (such as skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit-able attachments which are available at your SUZUKI dealer. Install the attachments properly and securely according to the instructions provided. Do not mount cargo directly on the roof panel. The cargo can damage the roof panel.
The gross weight of the roof rack plus cargo must not exceed the loading capacity.
- Roof Rails: 50 kg (110 lbs)
  Also, do not let the gross vehicle weight (fully loaded vehicle including driver, passengers, cargo, roof load and trailer tongue weight) exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed in “SPECIFICATIONS” section.
Mount and secure the cargo onto the roof rack properly according to the instructions provided. Stow the heaviest items at the bottom and distribute the cargo as evenly as possible.
Do not carry large items that hang over the bumpers or the sides of the vehicle. Otherwise, these items could block your view.
Secure the front and rear ends of long items such as wood panels and surf-boards, to both the front and rear of the vehicle. You should protect the painted surfaces of the vehicle from scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.
Check periodically that the roof rack is securely installed and free from damage. Secure the front and rear ends of long items such as wood panels and surf-boards, to both the front and rear of the vehicle. You should protect the painted surfaces of the vehicle from scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.
Check periodically that the roof rack is securely installed and free from damage.

WARNING

Abrupt maneuvers or failure to properly secure cargo can allow the cargo to fly off the vehicle and hit others, causing personal injury or property damage.

Mount cargo securely and avoid abrupt maneuvers such as jackrabbit starts, sharp turns, fast cornering and sudden braking. Check periodically that cargo is securely fastened.

Frame Hooks

WARNING
Observe the following instructions when using frame hooks. The towing eye or vehicle body may break and cause serious injury or damage:

Do not use the frame hooks for towing another vehicle.
Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out of severe snowy, muddy or sandy conditions, sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which could cause excessive stress on the towing eye.

In such case, we recommend that you contact a professional service.

Front

The towing eye (1) is provided on the front of the vehicle for use in emergency situations and sea shipping purpose only.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle, never use the towing eye (1) for trailer / train shipping.

Tools are stowed in the side of the luggage compartment. Remove the cover to access the tools.

Pick up the towing eye (1), jack handle (A) and wheel wrench (B) in the luggage compartment.
Remove the cover (C) by using a jack handle (A) covered with a soft cloth as shown in the illustration.
NOTE:
Do not use excessive force as it may dam-age the cover strap.
Install the towing eye (1) by hand.
NOTE:
It is recommended to secure the cover with tape to prevent damage during towing.
To tighten the towing eye (1), turn it clockwise by using a wheel wrench (B) until the towing eye (1) is securely installed. To remove the towing eye (1), reverse the installation procedure.

Rear

The frame hook (2) is provided on the rear of the vehicle for use in emergency situations and sea shipping purposes only.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle, never use the frame hook (2) for trailer / train shipping.

Other Holes

The frame holes (3) are provided only for transporting by a car carrier trailer.

NOTICE
Do not use the frame holes (3) for towing purpose. These holes may break and cause serious injury or damage.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, CONTROLS EQUIPMENT, ERTIGA, ERTIGA CONTROLS EQUIPMENT, New ERTIGA, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 DRIVING TIPS User Manual

DRIVING TIPS

WARNING
Fasten Your Seat Belts at All Times. Even though airbags are equipped at the front seating positions, the driver and all passengers should be properly restrained at all times, using the seat belts provided. Refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems” section for instructions on proper use of the seat belts.
Never drive while under the influence of alcohol or other drugs. Alcohol and drugs can seriously impair your ability to drive safely, greatly increasing the risk of injury to yourself and others. You should also avoid driving when you are tired, sick, irritated, or under stress.

Running-in

NOTICE
The future performance and reliability of the engine depend on the care and restraint exercised during its early life. It is especially important to observe the following precautions during the first 960 km (600 miles) of vehicle operation.

After starting, do not race the engine. Warm it up gradually.
Avoid prolonged vehicle operation at a constant speed. Moving parts will break in better if you vary your speed.
Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid full-throttle starts.
Avoid hard braking, especially during the first 320 km (200 miles) of driving.
Do not drive slowly with the transmission in high gear.
Drive the vehicle at moderate engine speeds.

Catalytic Converter

The purpose of the catalytic converter is to minimize the number of harmful pollutants in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic converters is prohibited because lead deactivates the pollutant-reducing components of the catalyst system.
The converter is designed to last the life of the vehicle under normal usage and when unleaded fuel is used. No special maintenance is required on the converter. However, it is very important to keep the engine properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can result from an improperly tuned engine, may cause overheating of the catalytic converter. This may result in permanent heat damage to the catalytic converter and other vehicle components.

NOTICE
To minimize the possibility of the catalytic converter or other vehicle damage:

Maintain the engine in the proper operating condition.
In the event of an engine malfunction, particularly one involving engine misfiring or other apparent loss of performance, have the vehicle serviced promptly.
Do not turn off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle, or coasting down a hill.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic testing.
Do not idle the vehicle for prolonged periods if idling seems rough or there are other malfunctions.
Do not allow the fuel tank to get near the empty level.
Avoid driving your vehicle at excessively high engine speed in or around the red zone of the tachometer.

WARNING
Be careful where you park and drive; the catalytic converter and other exhaust components can get very hot. As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust system.

Improving Fuel Economy

The following instructions will help you improve fuel economy.

Avoid excessive idling
If you park your vehicle for more than one minute, stop the engine and start it again later. When warming up a cold engine, do not allow the engine to idle or apply full throttle until the engine has reached operating temperature. Allow the engine to warm up by driving.

Avoid “fast” starts
Fast starts away from lights or stop signs will consume fuel unnecessarily and shorten engine life. Start off slowly.

Avoid unnecessary stops
Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stopping. Try to maintain a moderate, steady speed whenever possible. Slowing down and then accelerating again uses more fuel.

Keep a steady cruising speed
Drive at a constant speed that road and traffic conditions will permit.

Keep the air cleaner and clean

If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there will be greater intake resistance, resulting in decreased power output and increased fuel consumption.

Keep weight to a minimum
The heavier the load is, the more fuel the vehicle consumes. Unload any unnecessary luggage or cargo.

Keep tyre pressures correct
Underinflation of the tyres can waste fuel due to the increased rolling resistance of the tyres. Keep your tyres inflated to the correct pressure shown in the label on driver’s door lock pillar.

Highway Driving

When driving at highway speeds, pay attention to the following:
Stopping distance progressively increases with vehicle speed. Apply the brakes far enough ahead of the stopping point to allow for the extra stopping distance. On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur. Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contact between the road surface and the vehicle’s tyres due to a water film forming between them. Steering or braking the vehicle during hydroplaning can be very difficult, and loss of control can occur. Keep speed down when the road surface is wet.
At high speeds, the vehicle may be affected by side winds. Therefore, reduce speed and be prepared for unexpected buffeting, which can occur at the exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut of a hill, or when being overtaken by large vehicles, etc.

Driving on Hills

WARNING
Do not hold the brake pedal down too long or too often while going down a steep or long hill. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Failure to take this precaution could result in loss of vehicle control.

NOTICE
When descending a downhill, Never turn the ignition key to “LOCK” position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF). Emission control system and automatic transmission (if equipped) damage may result.

Driving on Slippery Roads

On wet roads, you should drive at a lower speed than you do on dry roads due to possible slippage of tyres during braking. When driving on icy, snow-covered, or muddy roads, reduce your speed and avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt braking, or sharp steering movements.

Snow Chains
Snow chains should only be used if they are needed to increase traction or are required by law. Make sure that the chains you use are the correct size for your vehicle’s tyres. Also make sure that there is enough clearance between the fenders and the chains as installed on the tyres.
Install the chains on the front tyres tightly, according to the chain manufacturer’s instructions. Retighten the chains after driving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if necessary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.

NOTICE

If you hear the chains hitting against the vehicle body while driving, stop and tighten them.
If your vehicle is equipped with full wheel caps, remove the wheel caps before installing the chains or the wheel caps can be damaged by the chain bands.

Stuck Vehicle
If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, or sand, follow the directions below

Shift the transmission back and forth between a forward range (or first gear for manual transmission) and reverse. This will create a rocking motion which may give you enough momentum to free the vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator to keep wheel spinning to a minimum wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the accelerator while shifting.
Do not race the engine. Excessive wheel spin will cause the tyres to dig deeper, making it more difficult to free the vehicle.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the ESP®, you may have to turn the ESP® system off in order to allow spinning the wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after a few minutes of rocking, we recommend you to consult a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop or a roadside assistance service. If a towing service is not avail-able in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by other vehicle with a towing cable or chain secured to the towing eye either on the front of the vehicle or on the rear of the vehicle. Refer to “Frame Hooks” in “OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT” section.

WARNING
Do not allow anyone to stand near the vehicle when you are rocking it, and do not spin the wheels faster than an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph) on the speedometer. Personal injury and/ or vehicle damage may result from spinning the wheels too fast.

NOTICE
Do not continue rocking the vehicle for more than a few minutes. Pro-longed rocking can cause engine overheating or transmission damage.

WARNING
In addition to following the driving tips in this section, it is important to observe the following precautions.
Make sure your tyres are in good condition and always maintain the specified tyre pressure. Refer to “Tyres” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section for details.

WARNING
Do not use tyres other than those specified by SUZUKI. Never use different sizes or types of tyres on the front and rear wheels. For information regarding the specified tyres, refer to the tyre information label located on the driver’s door lock pillar.

Never use oversized tyres or special shock absorbers and springs to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This will change the handling characteristics. Oversized tyres may also rub against the fender over bumps, causing vehicle damage or tyre failure. After driving through water, test the brakes while driving at a slow speed to see if they have maintained their normal effectiveness. If the brakes are less effective than normal, dry them by repeatedly applying the brakes while driving slowly until the brakes have regained their normal effectiveness.

Off-road Driving

Do not Drive in the Field Covered with Grown Grass
If you drive in a field covered with grass, it may cause an accident or vehicle damage by getting caught in grown grass.

When Encountering a Flooded Area

Avoid driving in a flooded area or a deep puddle. If driving in a flooded area is unavoidable, go slowly in the lowest gear. In case you have driven in a flooded area, stop the vehicle in a safe place while checking the brake effectiveness. Then, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to check the following inspection items.

Function of brake
The function of electrical components Changes of oil level and quality for engine, transmission and differential. In case the oil is turbid whitely, water has been mixed in the oil and an oil change is required.
Lubricant condition of the bearings, suspension joints, etc.

NOTICE
Avoid driving in a flooded area or a deep puddle. It may cause an engine stall, shortage in electrical components, engine and transmission damages, etc.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, DRIVING TIPS, ERTIGA, ERTIGA DRIVING TIPS, New ERTIGA, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE User Manual

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Daily Inspection Checklist

Before Driving

Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights and reflectors are clean and unobstructed.
Visually check the tyres for the following points:
- the depth of the tread groove
- abnormal wear, cracks and damage
- loose wheel nuts
- existence of foreign material such as nails, stones, etc.
  Refer to “Tyres” in “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section for details.
Look for fluid and oil leakage.
NOTE:
It is normal for water to drip from the air conditioning system while and after use.
Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched.
Check the headlights, turn signal lights, stop lights and horn for proper operation.
Adjust the seat and head restraint (if equipped).
Check the brake pedal feeling and the adjustment condition for the parking brake lever or pedal.
Refer to “Brake” in “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section for details.
Adjust the mirrors.
Make sure that you and all passengers have properly fastened the seat belts.
Make sure that all warning lights come on as the ignition switch is turned to ON position or the ignition switch is turned “ON” or pushed to “ON” mode.
Check all gauges.
Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING light turns off when the parking brake is released.

Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel tank, perform the following under-hood checks:

Engine oil level
Coolant level
Brake fluid level
Battery fluid (acid) level
Windshield washer fluid level
Hood latch operation Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. Make sure that you cannot open the hood all the way without releasing the secondary latch. Be sure to close the hood securely after checking for proper latch operation. See the item “All latches, hinges and locks” of “CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Periodic Maintenance Schedule” in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section for the lubrication schedule.

WARNING
Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched before driving. If it is not, it can fly up unexpectedly during driving, obstructing your view and resulting in an accident.
Once a month, or each time you fill your fuel tank, check the tyre pressure using a tyre pressure gauge. Also check the tyre pressure of the spare tyre.

Engine Oil Consumption

It is normal for the engine to consume some engine oil during normal vehicle operation.
The amount of engine oil consumption depends on the viscosity and quality of the oil and your driving conditions.
More oil is consumed during high-speed driving and when there is frequent acceleration and deceleration. Under high loads, your engine also will consume more oil. A new engine also consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings, and cylinder walls have not yet become conditioned. New engines reach the normal level of oil consumption only after approximately 5000 km (3000 miles) driving.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1 Qt. per 600 miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become diluted and it is difficult to judge the accurate oil level. As an example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more of driving. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed. You should also be aware that the diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is subsequently driven at high speeds, such as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after high-speed driving.

Ignition Switch (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System) (if equipped)

WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not operate controls by reaching through the steering wheel.

The ignition switch has the following four positions:

LOCK
This is the normal parking position. It is the only position in which the key can be removed.

Manual Transmission vehicles
You must push in the key to turn it to the “LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and prevents normal use of the steering wheel after the key is removed.
Automatic Transmission
vehicles The gearshift lever must be in the “P” (Park) position to turn the key to the “LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and prevents normal use of the steering wheel and gearshift lever. To release the steering lock, insert the key and turn it clockwise to one of the other positions. If you have trouble turning the key to unlock the steering wheel, try turning the steering wheel slightly to the right or left while turning the key.

ACC
Accessories such as the radio can operate, but the engine is off.

ON
This is the normal operating position. All electrical systems are on.

START
This is the position for starting the engine using the starter motor. The key should be released from this position as soon as the engine starts.

Ignition key reminder
A buzzer sounds intermittent to remind you to remove the ignition key if it is in the ignition switch when the driver’s door is opened.

WARNING
Never return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the ignition key while the vehicle is moving. The steering wheel will lock and you will not be able to steer the vehicle.

WARNING
Always return the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle even only for a short time. Also do not leave children alone in a parked vehicle. Unattended children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the transmission into neutral, which could result in an accident. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the power windows or other moving features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Engine Switch (Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System) (if equipped)

LOCK (OFF)
This mode is for parking the vehicle. When this mode is selected by pressing the engine switch and then any door (including the tailgate) is opened or closed, the steering will be locked automatically.

ACC
Press the engine switch to select this ignition mode to use such electric equipment as the audio system, outside rearview mirrors, and accessory socket with the engine off. When this position is selected, the “ACC” indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on. Refer to “Warning and Indicator Lights” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details.

ON
With the engine off
You can use such electric equipment as the power windows and wipers with the engine off. When this ignition mode is selected by pressing the engine switch, the Ignition “ON” indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on.
With the engine on
All electric equipment is operational. The vehicle can be driven when you have selected this ignition mode by pressing the engine switch.

START
Manual transmission – Provided you have the keyless push start system remote controller with you, the engine automatically starts when you press the engine switch to select this ignition mode after shifting to “N” (Neutral) and depressing the brake and clutch pedals. Automatic transmission– Provided you have the keyless push start system remote controller with you, the engine automatically starts when you press the engine switch to select this ignition mode after placing the gearshift lever in P position and depressing the brake pedal. (If you need to re-start the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift into “N”.)

NOTICE

Do not leave the engine switch in “ACC” or “ON” mode when the engine is not running. Avoid using the radio or other electric accessories for a long time when the engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” mode when the engine is not running, otherwise, the battery may discharge.
In the presence of a strong radio wave or noise, you may not be able to change the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” or to start the engine using the engine switch.

Keyless Push Start System (if equipped)

Provided the keyless push start system remote controller is within the interior workable area (refer to the related explanation in this section), you can use the engine switch for starting the engine and selecting an ignition mode (“ACC” or “ON”).

In addition, the following functions can be used:
Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless entry system transmitter /Keyless push start system remote controller (if equipped)” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. Locking and unlocking doors (including the tailgate) using a request switch. Refer to “Keyless entry system transmitter /Keyless push start system remote controller (if equipped)” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to “Immobilizer System” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details.

Engine Switch Illumination
The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the following situations:

When the engine is off and the driver’s door is open, or for 15 seconds after the driver’s door is closed. The illumination will fade out after 15 seconds passed.
When the engine is off and the position lights are on. The illumination will go out when the position lights are turned off.
When the engine is on and the position lights and/or the headlights are on. The illumination will go out when the position lights and the headlights are turned off.

NOTE:
To save the battery, the illumination will be automatically turned off when both of the following conditions are simultaneously met:

The headlights and position lights are turned off.
15 minutes have elapsed since opening the driver’s door.

Selection of Ignition Modes
Press the engine switch to select “ACC” or “ON” mode as follows when you use an electric accessory or check the operation of instruments without running the engine.

Bring the keyless push start system remote controller with you and sit in the driver’s seat.
Manual transmission – Without depressing the clutch pedal, press the engine switch (1).
Automatic transmission – Without depressing the brake pedal, press the engine switch (1).

Every time you press the engine switch, the ignition mode changes as follows.

Manual Transmission

Automatic Transmission

NOTE:
Automatic transmission – If the gearshift lever is in any position other than “P”, or if the knob button is pushed when the gearshift lever is in P position, the ignition mode cannot be returned to “LOCK” (OFF).

If the “PUSH” indicator light blinks and the ignition modes cannot be selected Your keyless push start system remote controller may not be sensed as being within the “interior workable area” (refer to the related explanation in this section). Try again after making sure you have the remote controller with you. If the ignition modes still cannot be selected, the battery of the remote controller may be discharged.

To be able to select an ignition mode, you must then use the following method:

Without depressing the brake pedal and the clutch pedal, push the engine switch (1).
Within about 10 seconds during which the “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster is blinking, touch the engine switch with the LOCK button end of the remote controller (2) for about 2 seconds.

NOTE:
If you still cannot select the ignition modes, there may be some problems with the keyless push-start system. Contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for an inspection of the system.

The immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light comes on for about 5 seconds while the “PUSH” indicator light is blinking. Refer to “Warning and Indica-tor Lights” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. You may customize the system to cause the interior buzzer to sound once for the “remote controller out of sensing range” warning. To incorporate this customization, please contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. If the battery of the remote controller is about to become completely discharged, the keyless push start system remote controller battery consumption warning light in the instrument cluster will come on for a few seconds when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ON”. Refer to “Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller Battery Consumption Warning Light” in “Keyless Entry System Transmitter/Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller (if equipped)” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. For details on replacing the battery, refer to “Keyless Entry System Transmitter/Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller (if equipped)” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.

“Remote Controller Outside” Warning
When either of the conditions described below is met, the system causes a “Remote Controller Outside” warning by sounding the interior and exterior buzzers. At the same time, the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light blinks.

Any door is opened and then closed while the remote controller is not inside the vehicle and the engine is running or the ignition mode has been changed to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine switch.
The remote controller is not inside the vehicle when you attempt to start the engine after changing the ignition mode to “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engine switch.

(1) Immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light (blinks)

NOTE:

If the warning is given, relocate the remote controller as soon as possible.
Any attempt to start the engine will fail while the warning is active. Blinking of the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate this condition. Refer to “Warning and Indicator Lights” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details.
Blinking of the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light should stop shortly after the remote controller is brought back inside the vehicle. If the immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light does not stop blinking, change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch and then perform the engine starting operation.
Always keep the remote controller with you as the driver.

Interior Workable Area for Engine Starting, Ignition Mode Selection and “Remote Controller Outside” Warning

Interior workable area

The “interior workable area” for these functions is defined as all the interior spaces except for the space above the instrument panel.

NOTE:
Even when the remote controller is in the “interior workable area”, if it is in any of the following conditions, you may not be able to start the engine or select the ignition modes, and the “remote controller outside” warning may be given.

- The remote controller’s battery is low.
- The remote controller is affected by strong radio signals or noise.
- The remote controller is in contact with or covered by a metallic object.
- The remote controller is in stowage like the glove box or a door pocket.
- The remote controller is in the sun visor pocket or on the floor.
- Even when the remote controller is outside the “interior workable area”, if it is in any of the following conditions, you may be able to start the engine or select the ignition mode.
- The “remote controller outside” warning may not be given at that time.
- The remote controller is outside the vehicle but very close to a door.
- The remote controller is on the instrument panel.

Parking Brake Lever

To set
To release
To release

The parking brake lever is located between the front seats. To set the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and pull the parking brake lever all the way up. To release the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and pull up slightly on the parking brake lever, push the button on the end of the lever with your thumb, and lower the lever to its original position. For automatic transmission vehicles, always set the parking brake before moving the gearshift lever to P (PARK) position. If you park on an incline and shift into “P” before setting the parking brake, the weight of the vehicle may make it difficult to shift out of “P” when you are ready to drive the vehicle. When preparing to drive the vehicle, move the gearshift lever out of the P position before releasing the parking brake.

WARNING

Never drive your vehicle with the parking brake on: rear brake effectiveness can be reduced from overheating, brake life may be shortened, or permanent brake damage may result.
If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle securely or does not fully release, have your vehicle inspected immediately by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.
When parking on an uphill, turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels point to the center of the road.
When parking on a downhill, turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels point to the curb.

WARNING
Whenever parking, make sure the gearshift lever for manual transmission vehicles is in 1st gear or “R” (Reverse) and the gearshift lever for automatic transmission vehicles is in “P” (Park). Remember, even though the transmission is in gear or in Park, you must set the parking brake fully.

WARNING
When parking the vehicle in extremely cold weather, the following procedure should be used:

Set the parking brake.
Manual Transmission – turn off the engine, then shift into reverse or first gear.
Automatic Transmission – shift into “P” (Park) and turn off the engine.
Get out of the vehicle and put chocks under the wheels.
Release the parking brake. When you return to your vehicle, you must remember to first set the parking brake, then remove the wheel chocks.

WARNING
Do not leave cigarette lighters, spray cans, soft drink cans, or plastic articles (such as glasses, CD cases, etc.) in sun-heated vehicles.

The temperature inside the vehicle may cause as follows:

Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can and may lead to a fire.
The glasses, plastic cards or CD cases, etc. may deform or crack.
Soft drink cans may fracture.

Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer
A buzzer sounds intermittent to remind you to release the parking brake if you start the vehicle without fully releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake system warning light is turned off.

Pedal

Manual TransmissionAutomatic Transmission

Clutch Pedal (1) (for Manual Transmission)
A clutch pedal is used to disengage the driving force to the wheels when starting the engine, stopping, or shifting the gear-shift lever. Depressing the pedal disengages the clutch.

WARNING
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. It could result in excessive clutch wear, clutch damage, or unexpected loss of engine braking.

Brake Pedal (2)
Your vehicle is equipped with front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. Depressing the brake pedal applies both sets of brakes. You may hear occasional brake squeals when you apply the brakes. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as temperature, humidity or dust, etc.

WARNING
If brake squeal is excessive and occurs each time the brakes are applied, you should have the brakes checked by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

WARNING
Do not apply brakes continuously or rest your foot on the brake pedal. This will result in overheating of the brakes which could cause unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or permanent brake damage.

Accelerator Pedal (3)
An accelerator pedal controls the speed of the engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal increases power output and speed.

Starting stopping Engine (Vehicle without Keyless Push Start System)

Before Starting the Engine

Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
Manual Transmission – Shift into “N” (Neutral). Hold the clutch pedal and brake pedal fully depressed. Automatic Transmission – If the gear-shift lever is not in P (Park) position, shift into “P” (Park). (If you need to re-start the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift into “N”.)

Starting a Cold and Warm Engine
With your foot taken off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning the ignition key to “START”. Release the key when the engine starts.

NOTICE
Stop turning the starter immediately after the engine has started or the starter system can be damaged.
Do not crank the engine for more than 12 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start on the first try, wait about 15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start after 12 seconds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds, and then press down the accelerator pedal to 1/3 of its stroke and try cranking the engine again. Release the key and accelerator pedal when the engine starts. If the engine still does not start, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while cranking.

Starting the Engine (Vehicle with Keyless Push Start System)

Before Starting the Engine

Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
Manual transmission – Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully depressed.
Automatic transmission – If the gear-shift lever is not in the P (Park) position, shift it to “P”. Hold the brake pedal fully depressed.
The “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on. Push the engine switch (1). When the engine is started, the starter motor will automatically stop.

WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake is set fully and the transmission is in Neutral (or Park for vehicles with an automatic transmission) before attempting to start the engine.

NOTICE
Do not depress the accelerator during the engine starting procedure.
If the engine does not respond when you try to start it with the engine switch or if the engine switch repeats cycling through “LOCK”(OFF) – “ACC” – “ON” mode, the battery may be dis-charged. Check the voltage of the battery before trying again.

NOTICE
You do not need to keep the engine switch pressed to start the engine.
The engine of a manual transmission vehicle will not start unless the clutch pedal is depressed.
Automatic transmission vehicles have a starter interlock device which is designed to keep the starter from operating if the transmission is in any of the drive positions.

Stopping Engine

NOTICE
Automatic transmission vehicles:
If you stop the engine while the vehicle is in motion, the automatic transmission may be damaged. Avoid stopping the engine while driving.

NOTE:

You do not need to keep the engine switch pressed to start the engine. Manual transmission vehicles:
The engine of a manual transmission vehicle will not start unless the clutch pedal is depressed. Automatic transmission vehicles:
Automatic transmission vehicles have a starter interlock device. The engine starts when the gearshift lever is in either the “P” or “N” position.

NOTE:

You do not need to keep the engine switch pressed to start the engine.
The engine of a manual transmission vehicle will not start unless the clutch pedal is depressed.
Automatic transmission vehicles have a starter interlock device which is designed to keep the starter from operating if the transmission is in any of the drive positions.
You should turn off such loads as the headlights and air conditioning system to facilitate starting of the engine.
Even if you fail to start the engine, the starter motor will stop turning automatically after a short time. After the starter motor has stopped or if there is some problem with the system, the starter motor will rotate only while the engine switch is being pressed.

Stopping the Engine

Depress the engine switch to stop the engine after the vehicle stopped completely.
In case of emergency, you can stop the engine by quickly pushing the engine switch more than 3 times, or pushing and holding the engine switch for more than 2 seconds while the vehicle in motion.

NOTE:
Except in cases of emergency, do not stop the engine while the vehicle is in motion. The steering and braking operation will require more effort when the engine is stopped.
Refer to “Braking” in this section.

NOTICE
If you stop the engine while the vehicle is in motion, the automatic trans-mission may be damaged.
Avoid stopping the engine while driving.

If the engine remains stopped for while after it was stopped unexpectedly or was raced before stopping, a clicking sound may be heard from around the engine when it is restarted. This is not a mal-function. Always let the engine idle before stopping it.
Starting a Cold and Warm Engine
With your foot taken off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “START”.

NOTICE
Do not crank the engine for more than 12 seconds at a time.
If the engine does not start on the first try, wait about 15 seconds before trying again.

After pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “START”, the starter cranks the engine for about 12 seconds before it can start the engine. If the engine fails to start at the first attempt, wait about 15 seconds, and then try again while keeping the engine switch pressed while pressing down the accelerator pedal to 1/3 of its stroke. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
If the engine still does not start, try holding the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while cranking.
If you are unable to start the engine using this procedure, consult a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

If the “PUSH” indicator light blinks and the engine cannot be started
Your keyless push start system remote controller may not be sensed as being within the interior workable area. Try again after checking that you have the remote controller with you. If the engine still can-not be started, the battery of the remote controller may be discharged. To start the engine, use the following method:

Make sure the parking brake is set fully.
Manual Transmission – Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch and brake pedals fully depressed.
Automatic Transmission – If the gear-shift lever is not in the P (Park) position, shift it to “P”. Hold the brake pedal fully depressed.
The “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster will come on. Press the engine switch (1).
Within about 10 seconds of blinking of the “PUSH” indicator light in the instrument cluster, touch the engine switch with the LOCK button end of the remote controller (2) for about 2 seconds.

NOTE:
If you still cannot start the engine after several attempts using the above method, there may be a problem elsewhere, such as a low battery. Contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for inspection.
The immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light will come on for about 5 seconds while the “PUSH” indicator light is blinking.
You may customize the system to cause the interior buzzer to sound once for a warning that the remote controller is out of sensing range. Please contact a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for the customization.

If the battery of the remote controller is about to become completely discharged, the keyless push start system remote controller battery consumption warning light in the instrument cluster will come on for a few seconds when you press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ON”. For details on replacing the battery, refer to “Keyless Entry System Transmitter/Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller (if equipped)” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.

Returning the Ignition Mode to “LOCK” (OFF)
Automatic Transmission – To ensure safety, the ignition mode can be returned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch only when the gearshift lever is placed in P position without pressing the knob button.

NOTE:
In the case of an automatic transmission model, the ignition mode cannot be returned to “LOCK” (OFF) mode if the gearshift lever is in any other position than “P”. Certain problems like a fault in engine system may prevent the engine switch from going back to “LOCK” (OFF) mode. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop after doing the following:

Lock the doors using the key to prevent theft. (The request switches and the key-less push start system remote controller cannot be used to lock them.)
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery to prevent discharge.
“LOCK” (OFF) mode reminder buzzer
If the driver’s door is opened without returning the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch, a buzzer sounds to warn you of this state.
If you open the driver’s door after pressing the engine switch to change the ignition mode to “ACC”, the interior buzzer beeps intermittently.
The buzzer will stop sounding if you then push the engine switch twice, thus bringing it back the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF).
NOTE:
Whenever you leave the vehicle, make sure you have returned the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) using the engine switch and then lock the doors. Without returning the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), you cannot use a request switch or keyless push start system remote controller to lock the doors.
Steering lock warning buzzer
If the steering lock fails to engage due to a fault in the system when the ignition mode is turned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the engine switch and any door (including the tailgate) is opened or closed, the interior buzzer will warn you of this condition with repeated short beeps. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Using the Transmission
WARNING
Do not hang any items on the gear-shift lever and do not use the gear-shift lever as a handiest. Otherwise, it could prevent proper operation of the gearshift lever and cause its mal-function, resulting in an accident.
Manual Transmission
Starting off
To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the way to the floor and shift into 1st gear. After releasing the parking brake, gradually release the clutch. When you hear a change in the engine’s sound, slowly press the accelerator while continuing to gradually release the clutch.
Shifting
All forward gears are synchronized, which provides for quiet and easy shifting. Always depress the clutch pedal all the way to the floor before shifting gears. Keep the engine speed does not rise into the red zone of the tachometer.
Downshifting maximum allowable speeds (5MT)
Downshifting km/h (mph)

2nd to 1st 20 (12)

3rd to 2nd 80 (49)

4th to 3rd 115 (71)

5th to 4th 155 (96)*
NOTE:
You may not accelerate to the maximum allowable speed because of the driving situation and/or the vehicle condition.
NOTICE
Do not downshift to a lower gear at the speed faster than the maximum allowable speeds for the next lower speed, or severe damage to engine and transmission can result.
WARNING
Reduce your speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a long or steep hill. A lower gear will allow the engine to provide braking. Avoid riding the brakes or they may overheat, resulting in brake failure. When driving on slippery roads, slow down before downshifting. Excessive and/or sudden changes in engine speed may cause loss of traction, which could cause you to lose control.

NOTICE
Make sure that the vehicle is completely stationary before you shift into reverse.

NOTICE
To help avoid clutch damage, do not use the clutch pedal as a footrest while driving or use the clutch to keep the vehicle stationary on a slope. Depress the clutch fully when shifting. When shifting or starting off, do not race the engine. Racing the engine can shorten engine life and cause negative effect to smooth shifting.

4Speed Automatic Transmission
Overdrive off switch
The transmission is a 4-speed (3-speed plus overdrive) automatic transmission. By operating the overdrive off switch, the transmission can be converted to a 3-speed automatic transmission that will not move to the overdrive position. To convert the transmission to the 3-speed mode, push in the overdrive off switch and release it. To return the transmission to the 4-speed mode, push in the overdrive off switch again. When the ignition switch is turned to ACC position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ACC”, the transmission in the 3-speed mode is con-verted to the 4-speed mode automatically.
The 3-speed mode is suitable for the following driving conditions:
Driving on hilly, winding roads
You can drive more smoothly with less frequent gear changing
Going down a steep hill
Some engine braking is provided

Gearshift lever

1knob button

The gearshift lever is designed so that it cannot be shifted out of P position unless the ignition switch is in ON position or the ignition mode is “ON” and the brake pedal is depressed.

WARNING
Always depress the brake pedal before shifting from “P” (Park) (or “N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is stationary) to a forward or reverse gear, to help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly when you shift.
The gearshift lever has a lock mechanism to help prevent accidental shifting.

To shift the gearshift lever:

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 BEFORE DRIVING User Manual 3

Shift with the knob button (1) pushed in and the brake pedal depressed.

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 BEFORE DRIVING User Manual 4

Shift with the knob button (1) pushed in.

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 BEFORE DRIVING User Manual 5

Shift without the knob button (1) pushed in.

NOTE:
Always shift the gearshift lever without pushing in the knob button (1) except when you shift from “P” to “R”, from “D” to “2”, from “2” to “L”, from “N” to “R” or from “R” to “P”. If you always push in the knob button (1) when shifting the gear-shift lever, you could shift into “P”, “R”, “2”, or “L” by mistake.
If driver’s or passenger’s knee hits the gearshift lever while driving, the lever could move and the gear could be changed unexpectedly.

Use the gearshift lever positions as described below:

P (Park)
Use this position to lock the transmission when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Shift into Park only when the vehicle is completely stationary.

R (Reverse)
Use this position to reverse the vehicle from a stop. Make sure that vehicle is completely stationary before shifting into Reverse.

N (Neutral)
Use this position for starting the engine if the engine stalls and you need to restart it while the vehicle is moving. You may also shift into Neutral and depress the brake pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during idling.

D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal driving. With the gearshift lever in “D” range you can get an automatic downshift by pressing the accelerator pedal. The higher the vehicle speed is, the more you need to press the accelerator pedal to get a downshift.

2 (Low 2)
Use this position to provide extra power when climbing hills, or to provide engine braking when going down hills.

L (Low 1)
Use this position to provide maximum power when climbing steep hills or driving through deep snow or mud, or to provide maximum engine braking when going down steep hills.

NOTE:
If you move the gearshift lever to a lower gear while driving faster than the maximum allowable speed for the lower gear, the transmission will not actually downshift until your speed drops below the maximum speed for the lower gear.

NOTICE

Do not shift the gearshift lever into “R” while moving forward, or the transmission may be damaged. If you shift into “R” when the vehicle speed is over 11 km/h (7 mph), the transmission will not shift into reverse.
Be sure to take the following precautions to help avoid damage to the automatic transmission:
Make sure that the vehicle is completely stationary before shifting into “P” or “R”.
Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”, “D”, “2”, or “L” when the engine is running above idle speed.
Do not rev the engine with the transmission in a drive position (“R”, “D”, “2”, or “L”) and the front wheels not moving.
Do not use the accelerator to hold the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehicle’s brakes.

If You Cannot Shift the Automatic Transmission Gearshift Lever Out of “P” (PARK)

Left-hand drive vehicle

Vehicles with an automatic transmission have an electrically operated park-lock feature. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, or there is some other electrical failure, the automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of Park in the normal way. Jump starting may correct the condition. If not, follow the procedure described below.

This procedure will permit shifting the transmission out of Park.

Be sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
If the engine is running, stop the engine.
Make sure the key is in “ON” or “ACC” position, or the ignition mode is “ON” or “ACC”.
Remove the cover (1) over the button.
With the release button (1) pushed by the key or the flat end rod, push the knob button (2) and shift the gearshift lever to the desired position.

This procedure is for emergency use only. If repeated use of this procedure is necessary, or the procedure does not work as described, take the vehicle to a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop for repair.

Right-hand drive vehicle

Be sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
If the engine is running, stop the engine.
Make sure the key is in “ON” or “ACC” position, or the ignition mode is “ON” or “ACC”.
With the release button (1) pushed, push the knob button (2) and shift the gearshift lever to the desired position.

Parking Sensors (if equipped)
The parking sensor system uses ultrasonic sensors to detect obstacles near the rear bumper. If obstacles are sensed while you are parking or moving the vehicle slowly, the system warns you by sounding a buzzer. The system emits an ultrasonic wave and the relevant sensor detects the return of the wave reflected by an obstacle. The system measures the time taken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the obstacle and return from it, from which it determines the obstacle’s position. The parking sensor function can be used when the ignition switch is turned “ON” or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “ON”, the gearshift lever is in R position and the parking sensor switch is in ON position. This function is helpful in the following cases: pulling over to the curb; parallel-parking the vehicle; steering the vehicle into a garage; driving along an alley; and moving slowly in a place with obstacles.

WARNING
The parking sensor warns you of obstacles with buzzers. However, you must still pay full attention yourself while driving.
The sensors can detect obstacles only within a limited area and only when the vehicle is moving within a limited speed range. So, in tricky areas, you must move the vehicle slowly while checking around it using your direct vision or rearview mirrors. There is increased risk of an accident if you control the vehicle relying only on the parking sensor.

Sensor Locations

Rear sensors (2 places)
NOTICE
Avoid hitting the sensor areas or directing the nozzle of a high-pressure car washer onto the sensor areas. Otherwise, the sensors may be damaged.
If the bumper hits a hard object, the sensors on it may not work properly. If this occurs, have the sensors inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Working sensors
The sensors that work depends on the position of the gearshift lever as follows:

Gearshift lever position

Manual Transmission

Automatic Transmission

N, 1st – 5th

N, D, 2 or L

Rear sensors

Center

Off

Approximate areas where obstacles can be detected

An obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in) from a sensor or just below a sensor is not detectable.
The sensors can detect an obstacle up to about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING
Under the following conditions, the parking sensor system may not work normally because the sensors cannot detect obstacles correctly.

- Sensors are covered with mud, ice or other materials. (Such materials must be removed for normal operation.)
- Sensors are wet from water splashes or heavy rain.
- Sensors are covered by a hand, sticker, accessory, etc.
- There is an accessory or other object attached within the sensor’s sensing area.
- Items such as tow hooks, commercially available corner poles, radio antenna, etc. are installed on the bumper.
- The height of the bumper is changed due to alteration to the suspension or other causes.
- The sensor areas are extremely hot from direct sunlight or cold due to freezing weather.
- The vehicle is on a rough sur-face, slope, gravel road or grass field.
- The vehicle is at a steep angle.
- Sensors have intercepted ultra-sonic noise from another vehicle’s horn, engine, air braking system (large vehicles), or parking sensor.
- Obstacles are too close to the sensors.
- Sensors are at an angle to a highly reflective object such as glass. (Ultrasonic waves are not reflected back from the obstacle.)
- Sensors may not be able to correctly detect the following types of obstacles:
- Objects made of a thin material like wire netting and ropes
- Square-shaped curbstones or other objects with sharp edges
- Tall objects with a large upper part like a road sign
- Low-profile objects such as curb-stones
- Sound-absorbing objects such as cotton and snow.

NOTE:
Thin poles or obstacles lower than the sensors may become undetectable as the vehicle moves closer to them even if they have been detected from longer distances.
The system may calculate the distance to a road sign or similar obstacle to be shorter than the actual distance.

How to Use the Parking Sensor

Parking sensor switch

Parking sensor switch
Indicator

- When the ignition switch is in the ON position or the ignition mode is “ON”, and the indicator light in the parking sensor switch is on, indicating that the parking sensor is ready for operation under the following conditions:
- The gearshift lever is in the R position.
To deactivate the parking sensor, push the parking sensor switch and make sure the indicator light goes off.

Switch position	State
	ON When the indicator light is on and all necessary conditions are met, system becomes ready for operation.
	OFF The system does not operate. Push the switch to turn off the indicator if you do not wish to use the parking sensor.

NOTE:
If you push the parking sensor switch from the OFF to ON position when the ignition switch is in the ON position or the ignition mode is “ON”, the inside buzzer sounds.
When the gearshift lever is shifted to the R position with the system ON, a buzzer will sound once.

Obstacle Indication by Parking Sensor
Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound.
A buzzer located behind the rear seat sounds when a sensor at the rear detects an obstacle.
Warnings when obstacles are detected by sensors.

Distance (approx.)	Buzzer
100 – 150 cm (39 – 59 in)	Short beeps at short intervals
60 – 100 cm (24 – 39 in)	Short beeps at very short intervals
Less than 60 cm (24 in)	Continuous beep

Warning and Indicator Messages
If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a buzzer and the status of the indicator on the parking sensor switch inform it. Follow its instruction.
The buzzer sounds intermittent. The indicated sensor is contaminated. Wipe it clean with a soft cloth. If the buzzer does not stop after wiping, there may be problem with the parking sensor system. Have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.
The indicator does not come on when the parking sensor switch is pressed. The indicator goes off while operating. There may be a problem with the parking sensor system, Have your vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

Braking

The distance needed to bring any vehicle to a halt increases with the speed of the vehicle. The braking distance needed, for example, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be approximately 4 times greater than the braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19 mph). Start to depress the brake pedal when there is plenty of distance between your vehicle and the stopping point, and slow down gradually.

WARNING
If water gets into the brake devices, brake performance may become poor and unpredictable. After driving through water or washing the underside of the vehicle, test the brakes while driving at a slow speed to see if they have maintained their normal effectiveness. If the brakes are less effective than normal, dry them by repeatedly applying the brakes while driving slowly until the brakes have regained their normal effectiveness.

Power-Assisted Brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If power assistance is lost due to a stalled engine or other failures, the system is still fully operational on reserve power and you can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by pressing the brake pedal once and holding it down. The reserve power is partly used up when you depress the brake pedal and reduces each time the pedal is pressed. Apply smooth and even pressure to the pedal. Do not pump the pedal.

WARNING
Even without reserve power in the brake system, you can still stop the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal harder than normally required. How-ever, the stopping distance may be longer.

Brake Assist System
When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system determines it to be an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS will help you avoid skidding by electronically controlling braking pressure. It will also help you maintain steering control when braking on slippery surfaces or when braking hard.
The ABS works automatically, so you do not need any special braking technique. Just push the brake pedal down without pumping. The ABS will operate whenever it senses that the wheels are locking up. You may feel the brake pedal moves a little while the ABS is operating.

NOTE:
The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is under about 9 km/h (6mph).
If the ABS system is activated, you may hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating in the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that the brake fluid pressure is being controlled properly.
You may hear an operation sound when you start the engine or after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the above systems are in the self-check mode. This sound does not indicate a malfunction.

WARNING

On some types of loose surfaces (such as gravel, snow-covered roads, etc.), the stopping distance required for a vehicle with ABS may be slightly greater than the one required for a comparable vehicle with a conventional brake system. With a conventional brake system, skidding tyres are able to plow the gravel or snow layer, shortening the stopping distance. ABS minimizes this resistance effect. Allow for extra stopping distance when driving on loose surfaces.
On regular paved roads, some drivers may be able to obtain slightly shorter stopping distances with conventional brake systems than with ABS.
In both of the above conditions, ABS will still offer the advantage of helping you maintain directional control. However, remember that ABS will not compensate for bad road or weather conditions or poor driver judgment. Use good judgment and do not drive too fast.
ABS warning light
Brake system warning light

WARNING
If the ABS warning light (1) on the instrument panel comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the ABS system. Ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to inspect the ABS system immediately. If the ABS system becomes inoperative, the brake system will function as an ordinary brake system that has no ABS. If the ABS warning light (1) and the Brake system warning light (2) on the instrument panel simultaneously stays on or comes on while driving, both anti-lock function and rear brake force control function (proportioning valve function) of the ABS system may have failed. If so, the rear wheels may easily skid or the vehicle can even spin in the worst case when braking on a slippery road or when hard braking even on a dry paved road. Ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work-shop to inspect the ABS system immediately. Drive carefully, avoiding hard braking as much as possible.

How the ABS Works
A computer continuously monitors wheel speed. The computer compares the changes in wheel speed when braking. If the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a skidding situation, the computer will change braking pressure several times each second to prevent the wheels from locking. When you start your vehicle or when you accelerate after a hard stop, you may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise as the system resets or checks itself.

WARNING
The ABS may not work properly if tyres or wheels other than those specified in the owner’s manual are used. This is because the ABS works by comparing changes in wheel speed. When replacing tyres or wheels, use only the size and type specified in this owner’s manual.

Electronic stability program (ESP®) (if equipped

ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) helps to control the vehicle during cornering if front wheels or rear wheels skid. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engine’s output, and by selectively applying the brakes. In addition, ESP® helps to avoid skidding by controlling braking pressure.

WARNING
The ESP® cannot enhance the vehicle’s driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicle’s entire braking system. The ESP® can-not prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only safe and attentive drive can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP®-equipped vehicle must never be used as a substitute for careful driving. The ESP® totally manages following four systems, (stability control, traction control, ABS and Brake assist) to help enhance vehicle stability in response to various driving conditions;

Stability control system
The vehicle stability control system helps provide integrated control of systems such as anti-lock brakes, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the brakes and engine to help pre-vent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or when turning the steering wheel abruptly.

Traction control system
The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces. The system operates only if it senses that some of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system operates the front or rear brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

NOTE:
You may hear an operation sound when you start the engine or after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the above systems are in the self-check mode. This sound does not indicate a malfunction.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS will help you avoid skidding by electronically controlling braking pressure. It will also help you maintain steering control when braking on slippery surfaces or when braking hard. The ABS works automatically, so you do not have to use any special braking technique. Just push the brake pedal down without pumping. The ABS will operate whenever it senses that wheels are locking up. You may feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.(For more information on ABS, see “Braking” in this section.)

NOTE:
The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is under about 9 km/h (6 mph).

WARNING
The ESP® may not work properly if tyres or wheels other than those specified in the owner’s manual are used. When replacing tyres or wheels, use only the size and type specified in this owner’s manual.

The ESP® may not work properly if tyres are not inflated to the recom-mended tyre pressure.
The ESP® may not work properly if tyres are fitted with snow chains.
The ESP® may not work properly if the tyres are excessively worn. Replace tyres when the tread wear indicators in the grooves appear on the tread surface.
The ESP® is not a substitute for winter tyres or snow chains on a snow-covered road.

WARNING

The ESP® may not work properly if engine related parts such as the muffler are not equivalent to standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension since the ESP® may not work properly.

NOTE:
If the ESP® system is activated, you may hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating in the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that the brake fluid pressure is being controlled properly.
You may hear an operation sound when you start the engine or after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the above systems are in the self-check mode. This sound does not indicate a malfunction.

The ESP® indicator lights are described below:

ESP® warning light

This light blinks 5 times per second when one of the following systems is activated.

Stability control system
Traction control system
If this light blinks, drive carefully.
When the ignition switch is turned “ON” or pushed to “ON ” mode, this light comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working.
NOTICE
If the ESP® warning light comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a malfunction of the ESP® systems (other than ABS). You should have the systems inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified work-shop.
NOTE:
When the ESP® warning light comes on and stays on while driving, indicating a malfunction of the ESP® systems (other than ABS), the brake system will function as an ordinary ABS with no additional ESP® functions.
ESP® OFF indicator light

You should turn the ESP® on during your ordinary driving, so that you have the ben-efits of all of the ESP® systems.
It may be required to turn the ESP® sys-tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow, where wheel spin is necessary.

ESP® OFF switch

(1) ESP® OFF switch

When the ESP® OFF switch located at the instrument panel is pushed and held to turn off the ESP® systems (other than ABS), the ESP® OFF indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on.
When you have turned the ESP® systems (other than ABS) off, turn them back on before resuming ordinary driving.
When you push the ESP® OFF switch again, the ESP® OFF indicator light will go out and all of the ESP® systems will be activated.

ABS warning light / brake system warning light
See “Braking” in this section.

Hill hold control system (if equipped)
The hill hold control system is designed to assist you in starting to move up hills. When you start to move up a hill, the system helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling downward (for approximately 2 seconds) while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

WARNING
Do not rely excessively on the hill hold control system. The hill hold control system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downward on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling downward. Failure to pay attention and depress the brake pedal to hold the vehicle on a hill when necessary, may result in loss of control or an accident.
The hill hold control system is not designed to stop the vehicle on a hill.
After you release your foot from the brake pedal, accelerate the vehicle to move up immediately. If you release your foot from the brake pedal over 2 seconds, the hill hold control system will be canceled. If so, the vehicle may roll downward, which can result in an accident depending on the degree of slope. And, the engine may stall and the power assist for the steering and brakes will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual which can result in an accident or vehicle damage.

The hill hold control system activates for a maximum of about 2 seconds if your foot is moved from the brake pedal when the fol-lowing conditions are all met.

The gearshift lever is in a forward gear or reverse gear.
The parking brake is released.
The vehicle is on an upward incline.

NOTE:
When the hill hold control system is activated, the following conditions may be found, but this is not a malfunction.

You may hear a sound from the engine room.
As brake pedal becomes heavy, it may be difficult for you to depress it.

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 User Manual

Download Manuals: https://suzuki-aftersales.net/manuals

Tags Auto User Guide, ERTIGA, ERTIGA OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE, New ERTIGA, Operating Your Vehicle, Suzuki, Suzuki 2018, Suzuki ERTIGA, Suzuki ERTIGA 2018, Suzuki New, Suzuki New 2018, Suzuki New ERTIGA

ERTIGA Suzuki

2018 Suzuki New ERTIGA BEFORE DRIVING User Manual

Before you start your trip with the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga, it’s important to learn about the most important parts of the car so you can drive safely and easily. From making sure the seats and mirrors are set up for maximum comfort and visibility to knowing how to handle the lights, indicators, and wipers, every little thing helps you feel in charge on the road. You can drive with confidence if you know how to use seat belts correctly, how to set the parking brake, and what the warning lights on the dashboard mean. Also, knowing how to use the air conditioner, the radio controls, and the gear shifter will make sure that your trip is both comfortable and under control. If you know how to check your car’s fluids, tire pressure, and emergency tools, you’ll be ready for anything. When you get behind the wheel of the 2018 Suzuki New Ertiga, this information will help you have a safe and fun trip.

BEFORE DRIVING

Immobilizer System

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft by electronically disabling the engine starting system.
The engine can be started only with your vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key, which has an electronic identification code programmed in it. The key communicates the identification code to the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned “ON”. If you need to make spare keys, see a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop. The vehicle must be programmed with the correct identification code for the spare. A key made by an ordinary locksmith will not work.

If the immobilizer system warning light blinks when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the engine will not start.
If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position, and then turn it back to the “ON” position.
If the light still blinks after the ignition switch is turned back to the “ON” position, there may be something wrong with your key or with the immobilizer system. Ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system inspected.

NOTE:

If you lose your immobilizer ignition key, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible to deactivate the lost one and to make a new key.
If you own other vehicles with immobilizer keys, keep those keys away from the ignition switch when using your SUZUKI vehicle. Otherwise, the engine may not be started because they may interfere with your SUZUKI vehicle’s immobilizer system.
If you attach any metal objects to the immobilizer key, it may not start the engine.

NOTICE
The immobilizer key is a sensitive electronic instrument.

To avoid damaging it:

Do not expose it to impacts, moisture or high temperature such as on the instrument panel under direct sunlight.
Keep it away from magnetic objects.
Do not modify or remove the immobilizer system.
If modified or removed, the system cannot be properly operated.
This immobilizer system is maintenance-free.

Door Locks

Side Door Locks

UNLOCK
LOCK
front
Rear

To lock a door from outside the vehicle:

Insert the key and turn the top of the key backward of the vehicle.
Push the lock knob down, then pull and hold the door handle as you close the door.
To unlock a door from outside the vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of the key forward of the vehicle.

LOCK
UNLOCK

To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob rearward to unlock the door.
To lock a rear door from outside the vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and close the door. You do not need to pull and hold the door handle as you close the door.

NOTE:
Be sure to hold the door handle when you close a locked front door, or the door will not remain locked.

Central Door Locking System

UNLOCK
LOCK
Front
Rear

You can lock and unlock all doors (including the tailgate) simultaneously by using the key in the driver’s door lock.
To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the key in the driver’s door lock and turn the top of the key toward the front of the vehicle once.
To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert the key in the driver’s door lock and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle twice.
To unlock the driver’s door only, insert the key in that door lock and turn the top of the key toward the rear of the vehicle once.

LOCK
UNLOCK

You can also lock or unlock all doors by depressing the front or rear of the switch, respectively.

NOTE:

You can also lock or unlock all doors by operating the transmitter or remote controller. Refer to “Keyless push start system remote controller / Keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped)” in this section.
If your vehicle is equipped with the key-less push start system, you can also lock or unlock all doors by pushing the request switch. Refer to “Keyless push start system remote controller / Keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped)” in this section.

Child-Proof Locks (rear door)

(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK

Each of the rear doors is equipped with a child-proof lock which can be used to help prevent unwanted opening of the door from inside the vehicle. When the lock lever is in LOCK position (1), the rear door can only be opened from outside. When the lock lever is in UNLOCK position (2), the rear door can be opened from inside or outside.

WARNING
Place the child-proof lock in LOCK position whenever children are seated in the rear.

Tailgate

WARNING
Always make sure that the tailgate is closed and latched securely. Completely closing the tailgate helps pre-vent occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of an accident. Completely closing it also helps keep exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

Type 1

(1) Tailgate handle

You can lock and unlock the tailgate by using the key in the driverâ€™s door lock.
To open the tailgate, pull up the tailgate handle (1) and lift the tailgate.
If you cannot unlock the tailgate by using the key in the driverâ€™s door lock due to a discharged lead-acid battery or malfunction, follow the procedure below to unlatch the tailgate from inside the vehicle.

Fold the rear seat forward for easier access. Refer to “Folding rear seats” section for details on how to fold the rear seat forward.
Open the cover (2) in the lock mechanism of the tailgate.
NOTE:
Be careful not to lose the cover (2) because it is small and detachable.
Move the lever (3) in arrow direction by using a flat-bladed screwdriver to unlock the tailgate.
Push open the tailgate from inside. The tailgate will be latched again by simply closing the tailgate.

If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by pushing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicle inspected by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.

CAUTION
Check that there is no one near the tailgate when pushing open the tail-gate from inside the vehicle.

Type 2

To open the tailgate, insert the key and turn it clockwise to unlatch and lift the tail-gate.

NOTICE
Do not use the key to lift up the tail-gate, or the key may break off in the lock.

Keyless entry system transmitter /Keyless push start system remote controller (if equipped)

Keyless Entry System Transmitter

Your vehicle is equipped with either a keyless entry system transmitter (Type A) or a keyless push start system remote controller (Type B). The transmitter has only a keyless entry function. The remote controller has a keyless entry function and a keyless push-start system. The transmitter has only a keyless entry function. For details, refer to the following explanations.

WARNING
Radio waves from the keyless push start system antenna(s) may interfere with the operation of electrical medical equipment such as pacemakers. Failure to take the precautions listed below can increase the risk of severe injury or death due to radio wave interference.

Anyone who uses electrical medical equipment such as a pacemaker should consult the medical equipment supplier or their medical advisor about whether radio waves from the antenna(s) can interfere with the medical equipment. If radio wave interference is a concern, have the function of the antenna(s) disabled by a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop.
Keyless Entry System Transmitter (Type A)

LOCK button
UNLOCK button

You can lock or unlock all doors (including the tailgate) simultaneously by operating the transmitter near the vehicle.

Central door locking system

To lock all doors, push the LOCK button (1) once.
To unlock only the driver’s door, push UNLOCK button (2) once.
To unlock other doors, push UNLOCK button (2) once again.

NOTE:
You can switch the function that unlocks all doors from requiring two pushes to requiring one push, and vice versa, via the information display setting mode. For details on how to use the information display, refer to “Information display” in this section. The turn signal lights will flash once when the doors are locked.

When the doors are unlocked:

The turn signal lights will flash twice.
If the interior light switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior light will turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade out. If you insert the key into the ignition switch during this time, the light will start to fade out immediately. Be sure the doors are locked after you operate the LOCK button (1).

NOTE:
If no door is opened within about 30 seconds after the UNLOCK button (2) is operated, the doors will automatically lock again.

NOTE:
The maximum operating distance of the keyless entry system transmitter is about 5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending on the surroundings, especially near other transmitting devices such as radio towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios. The door locks cannot be operated with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.

When any door is open, the door locks can be operated only unlock with the transmitter.
If you lose one of the transmitters, ask a SUZUKI dealer or a qualified workshop dealer as soon as possible for a replacement. Be sure to have your dealer program the new transmitter code in your vehicle’s memory so that the old code is erased.

NOTICE
The transmitter is a sensitive electronic instrument.

To avoid damaging the transmitter:
Do not expose it to impacts, moisture or high temperature such as by leaving it on the dashboard under direct sunlight.
Keep the transmitter away from magnetic objects such as a television.

Battery replacement

If the transmitter becomes unreliable, replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the transmitter:

Remove the screw (1), and open the transmitter cover.
Remove the transmitter (2).
Button type lithium battery: CR1616 or equivalent
Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth in the slot of the transmitter (2) and pry it open.
Replace the battery (3) so its + terminal faces the “+” mark of the transmitter.
Close the transmitter and install it into the transmitter holder.
Close the transmitter cover, install and tighten the screw (1).
Make sure the door locks can be operated with the transmitter.
Dispose of the used battery properly according to applicable rules or regulations. Do not dispose of lithium batteries as ordinary household trash.

WARNING
Swallowing a lithium battery may cause serious internal injury. Do not allow anyone to swallow a lithium battery. Keep lithium batteries away from children and pets. If swallowed, contact a physician immediately.

NOTICE
The transmitter is a sensitive electronic instrument. To avoid damaging it, do not expose it to dust or moisture or tamper with internal parts.
When replacing the battery by yourself, the transmitter controller could be damaged or affected by static electricity. Discharge the static electricity built up in your body by touching metal before replacing the battery.

NOTE:
Used batteries must be disposed of properly according to applicable rules or regulations and must not be disposed of with ordinary household trash.

Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1) indicates that a used battery should be collected separately from ordinary household trash.
By ensuring the used battery is disposed of or recycled correctly, you will help prevent

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 Controls and Equipment User Manual

Controls and Equipment

Heating and Air Conditioning System

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System

(Digital Air Conditioning System)

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control)

Radio Antenna

Audio System (if equipped)

Fuel Filler Cap

Engine Hood

Sun Visor

Interior Light

Accessory Socket (if equipped)

Assist Grips

Glove Box

AUX/USB Socket (if equipped)

Cup Holder and Storage Area

Footrest (if equipped)

Roof Rails (if equipped)

Frame Hooks

Reference Links

2018 Suzuki New ERTIGA Seats and Floor Mats

For Safe Driving

Front Seats

Rear Seats

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

Seat Belt Catch Hole (for 2nd Row Seats)

Seat Belt Inspection

Child Restraint Systems

Child restraint

Booster seat

Child Restraint System

Child Restraint (for the 2nd Row Center Seat Type with the Lap Belt)

Installation with Lap-Shoulder

ELR type belt

Installation with ISOFIX Type Anchorages

Installation of Child Restraint with Top Tether

Seat Belt Pretensioner System

Supplemental Restraint System (Airbags)

AIRBAG light

Front Airbags

Driver’s front airbag

Airbag symbol meaning

How the System Works

FAQ

Useful Link

Suzuki New CARRY 2019 Air Conditioning System User Manual

Air Conditioning System

Radio Antenna (If Equipped)

Installation of Radio Frequency Transmitters

Audio System (If Equipped)

Getting Started

Display Indication

Reference Links

Suzuki New CARRY 2019 System Operating User Manual

System Operating Instructions

Air Conditioning System (Right Hand Drive Vehicle) (If Equipped)

Reference Links

Suzuki New CARRY 2019 Cleaning Interior User Manual

Cleaning Interior

Leather upholstery

Washing

Reference Links

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2020 Servicing the Airbag System User Manual

Servicing the airbag system

Exhaust Gas Warning

Keys

Reference Links

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 SUPPLEMENT User Manual

SUPPLEMENT

For Mexico

Vehicle Identification

Engine Serial Number

For Chile

For Thailand

Reference Links

Suzuki New ERTIGA 2018 SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS